2007 Mercury Mountaineer Owners Manual

Table of Contents
Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 10
Warning and control lights 10
Gauges 14
Entertainment Systems 18
AM/FM stereo with CD 18
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD 21
Climate Controls 37
Manual heating and air conditioning 37
Automatic temperature control 39
Auxiliary passenger climate control 42
Rear window defroster 43
Lights 44
Driver Controls 55
Windshield wiper/washer control 55
Steering wheel adjustment 56
Power windows 61
Mirrors 62
Speed control 64
Message center 75
Locks and Security 92
Keys 92
Locks 92
Anti-theft system 94
Seating and Safety Restraints 105
Seating 105
Safety restraints 117
Airbags 130
Child restraints 138
2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Tires, Wheels and Loading 151
Tire Information 153
Tire Inflation 155
Changing tires 159
Lug Nut Torque 167
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 177
Vehicle loading 182
Trailer towing 189
Recreational towing 194
Driving 195
Starting 195
Brakes 198
Traction control/AdvanceTrac 201
Transmission operation 205
Roadside Emergencies 219
Getting roadside assistance 219
Hazard flasher switch 220
Fuel pump shut-off switch 220
Fuses and relays 221
Jump starting 231
Wrecker towing 237
Customer Assistance 238
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 246
Cleaning 247

USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications 253
Engine compartment 255
Engine oil 258
Battery 263
Engine Coolant 265
Fuel information 271
Air filter(s) 285
Part numbers 286
Refill capacities 287
Lubricant specifications 290
Accessories 296
Index 298
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical

including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2005 Ford Motor Company

USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Mercury. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle

When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.

USA (fus)
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage,
Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L Power Stroke
Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions
Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description
of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide
that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should

NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.
Service Data Recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;

USA (fus)
Introduction
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.
MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.

USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front
Air Bag-Side Child Seat
Child Seat Installation Child Seat Lower

Warning Anchor
Child Seat Tether

Brake System
Anchor
Brake Fluid -
Anti-Lock Brake System
Non-Petroleum Based
Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield Rear Window

Defrost/Demist Defrost/Demist

USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Power Window Lockout
Front/Rear
Interior Luggage
Child Safety Door
Compartment Release
Lock/Unlock
Symbol
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,

Battery Acid
or Sparks
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
MAX
Maintain Correct Fluid
Power Steering Fluid MIN
Level
Emission System Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Jack
Air Filter
Check fuel cap Low tire warning

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Standard instrument cluster
Optional instrument cluster
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the
respective system inspected immediately.
Service engine soon: The Service SERVICE
engine soon indicator light ENGINE
illuminates when the ignition is first SOON
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
10

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Check fuel cap (if equipped): CHECK

Illuminates when the fuel cap may
not be properly installed. Continued FUEL
driving with this light on may cause CAP
the Service engine soon light to
come on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning ! P
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your dealership. Illumination after
releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake
system should be inspected immediately by your servicing dealership.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer immediately.
Anti-lock brake system: If the

ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has ABS
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately. Normal
braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is
illuminated.
11

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately. A chime will also
sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt.
Charging system: Illuminates when

the battery is not charging properly.
Check gage: Illuminates when any CHECK

of the following conditions has
occurred: GAGE
• The engine coolant temperature
is high.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The fuel gauge is at or near empty.
Low tire warning (if equipped
with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System): Illuminates
when your tire pressure is low. If
the light remains on at start up or
while driving, the tire pressure should be checked. Refer to Inspecting
and Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON,
have the system inspected by your servicing dealership. For more
information on this system, refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Electronic throttle control:
Illuminates when the engine has
defaulted to a ’limp-home’ operation.
Report the fault to a dealer at the
earliest opportunity.
12

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Overdrive off: Illuminates when
the overdrive function of the
O/D
transmission has been turned off, OFF
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
AdvanceTrac威 (if equipped):
Illuminates when the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC system is active. If the
light remains on, have the system
serviced immediately.
AWD lock (if equipped): AWD

Illuminates when all wheel drive
(AWD) is locked. If the light LOCK
continues to flash, have the system
serviced.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Door ajar (if equipped):

Illuminates when the ignition is in DOOR
the ON position and any door is
open. AJAR
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
13

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Turn signal warning chime: Sounds when the turn signal lever has
been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is
driven more than 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
GAUGES
Standard instrument cluster gauges
Optional instrument cluster gauges
14

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature

gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible,
switch off the engine and let the
engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.

• Standard instrument cluster TRIP
• Optional instrument cluster

Refer to Message Center in the
Drivers Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
15

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
• Standard instrument cluster
Press and release the TRIP
SELECT/RESET button to toggle
between odometer and trip
odometer display.
• Optional instrument cluster
Press and release the TRIP/RESET
button to toggle between odometer
and trip odometer display.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine

speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Battery voltage gauge: Indicates

the battery voltage when the
ignition is in the ON position. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
normal operating range (as
indicated by arrows), have the
vehicle’s electrical system checked
as soon as possible.
16

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle
checked at your dealership or by a
qualified technician.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The arrow next to the fuel pump
icon indicates which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
17

USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO / SINGLE CD RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4
VOL - PUSH ON
AM
FM FM1 ST SCN
BASS TREB BAL FADE
CD CLK
12 DISC
SEEK EJ
TUNE COMP
11
CD CD SHUFFLE
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5
10 9 8 7
1. BAL (Balance): Press /

to shift sound to the left/right
speakers.
2. FADE: Press / to shift

sound to the front/rear speakers.
3. SCN (Scan): Press to hear a

brief sampling of all listenable
stations or CD tracks. Press again to
stop.
4. CLK (Clock): To set the hour, CLK
press and hold CLK and press SEEK
to decrease or increase the
hours.
18

USA (fus)
To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease
or increase the minutes.
5. EJ (Eject): Press to eject a CD.
6. COMP (Compression): In CD
mode, press to bring louder and
softer levels into more comfortable
listening level. The compression icon (c) will appear in the display.
7. SHUFFLE: Press to listen to the SHUFFLE
6
tracks on the CD in random order.
Press again to turn off.
8. Memory presets: To set a CD CD SHUFFLE
1 2 3 4 5 6
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station. Press and
hold a preset button until sound returns. This radio is equipped with six
station memory preset controls which allow you to set up to six AM
stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
9. CD : Press and hold until
desired point of a selection is
reached.
10. CD: Press and hold until
desired point of a selection is
reached.
11. TUNE: In radio mode, press to
move up or down the frequency
band in individual increments.
12. SEEK: Press and release
SEEK / for previous/next
strong station, selection or track.
13. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
19

USA (fus)
14. CD: Press to enter CD mode or
to play a CD already loaded into the
system.
15. AM/FM: Press to choose a
frequency band in radio mode.
16. BASS: Press / to

increase/decrease the bass output.
17. TREB (Treble): Press /

to increase/decrease the treble
output.
18. CD slot: Insert a CD printed DISC
side up.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only.
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.
20

USA (fus)
AUDIOPHILE SATELLITE COMPATIBLE AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH
SIX CD RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Seek: Press and release

strong station or track.
2. Rewind: In CD mode, press until
desired point within the current
selection is reached.
Fast forward: In CD mode, press until desired point within the current
selection is reached.
TEXT: TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit
to enable Satellite reception is available through your Mercury dealer.
Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the continental United
States.
3. DSP (Digital Signal
Processing): Press DSP to access
the Ambiance menu. Ambiance gives
the feeling of “being there” to your
music, creating increased clarity as well as an open and spacious feel to
the music. Press SEL to engage/disengage. Turn the volume control to
increase/decrease the level of ambiance.
21

USA (fus)
Occupancy: Press DSP again to change the occupancy mode to optimize
sound for ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS. Press SEL to
scroll through settings.
4. Mute: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to
playing media.
5. Eject: Press to eject a CD. Press
EJ and a memory preset to eject a
specific disk. Press and hold to eject
all loaded discs.
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
SEL / to decrease/increase
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance, Fade and other menu
selections.
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press

SEL / to shift sound to the
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FADE; then press
rear/front speakers.
9. Menu: Press MENU to access
clock mode, RDS on/off, Traffic
announcement mode, Program type
mode, Shuffle and Compression
mode.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio
broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.
22

USA (fus)
Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press
SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is
broadcasting RDS data).Traffic information is not available in most
U.S. markets.
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a
certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.
Press MENU until FIND appears in the display. Use SEL to scroll through
music types. Press SEEK or SCAN to search for station playing
requested music category.
Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters or music format.
Press MENU until SHOW appears in the display. Use SEL to select
NONE, NAME or TYPE.
Shuffle: Press to play tracks in a random order. Press MENU until
SHUFFLE appears in the display. Use SEL to select SHUFFLE DISC,
SHUFFLE TRK or SHUFFLE OFF.
Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
Press MENU until COMPRESS is displayed. Press the SEL control to
enable the compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed.
Press the SEL control again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON
is displayed.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS
is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the
hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.
10. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound
returns.
11. SAT (if equipped): Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped
with Satellite Ready capability. The
kit to enable the Satellite reception is available through your Mercury
dealer. Detailed satellite instructions are included with the dealer
installed kit. Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the
continental United States.
23

USA (fus)
12. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM
frequency band.
Autoset: Allows you to set the
strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set
preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press and momentarily hold AM/FM.
AUTOSET will be shown. When the six strongest stations are filled, the
station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six
strong stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining
presets. Press and hold again to disengage.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio
volume changes automatically and
slightly with vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0
turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting.
Press and hold the volume control for five seconds. Then press SEL to
increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the volume setting. The level will
appear in the display.
14. Load: Press to load a CD. Press
LOAD and a specific memory preset
to load a specific disc. Press and
hold to load up to six discs.
15. CD AUX: Press to access CD or
AUX mode.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only.
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.
24

USA (fus)
16. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a
brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
17. Disc/Tune: Press or to
manually tune down/up the radio
frequency band, or change to the
previous/next CD.
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your
to enable Satellite reception is available through your Mercury dealer.
Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the continental United
States.
For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at
www.siriusradio.com
SATELLITE COMPATIBLE AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH SINGLE
CD/MP3 RADIO — LATE AVAILABILITY (IF EQUIPPED)

25

USA (fus)
2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album
text (AL) may be viewed while
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the
message display its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text
fields. The display will scroll through all of the text in the current field
before changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within 3
seconds of the previous press to proceed to the next/last text display.
The last text field shown on the display will become the new display
message default.
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions
are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed satellite kit
only available in the continental United States.
3. AUX: This function is not
operational.
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing

playing media
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD.

the bass output.
the treble output.
selections.

26

USA (fus)
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to
access AUTOSET, Speed sensitive
volume and Setting the clock.
Autoset: Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL
to toggle ON/OFF. Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations
without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2
. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Speed sensitive volume: Press MENU until SPEED VOL X appears in
the display. Then press SEL to increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the
volume setting. The level will appear in the display.
Radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0
turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting.
Folder/Track mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in
the display. Use SEL to toggle between FOLDER (only tracks within
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are
accessible) MODE.
10. REPEAT: Repeats current
CD/MP3 track when active (ON).
Press to shown repeat status. Press
again to toggle status.
11. SHUFFLE: Plays CD/MP3
tracks in random order when active
(ON). Press to show shuffle status.
Press again to toggle status.
12. FOLDER : Press to access
the next MP3 directory.
27

USA (fus)
the previous MP3 directory.
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD/MP3

mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
15. REW(Rewind): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite Ready
capability. The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed
satellite kit only available in the continental United States.
17. BAND: Press to toggle between
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

station: Select frequency band; tune
to a station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
20. CD: Press to enter CD mode.
28

USA (fus)
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
21. COMP(Compression): Brings
soft and loud CD passages together
for a more consistent listening level
when in CD mode. Press COMP to turn the feature ON/OFF.
CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.
23. CAT/Tune: Press or to
manually tune down/up the radio frequency band.

radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite
www.siriusradio.com
24. CD slot: Insert a CD with the label side up.
29

USA (fus)
AUDIOPHILE SATELLITE COMPATIBLE AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH
SIX CD/MP3 RADIO — LATE AVAILABILITY (IF EQUIPPED)

2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album
text (AL) may be viewed while
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the
message display its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text
fields. The display will scroll all of the text in the current field before
changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within 3 seconds of
the previous button press to proceed to the next/last text display.)
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your
to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed
Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer
installed satellite kit only available in the continental United States.
30

USA (fus)
3. AUX: This function is not
operational.
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing

playing media
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD. Press EJ
and a memory preset to eject a
specific disc. Press and hold to eject
all loaded discs.
the bass output.
the treble output.
functions.

9. Menu: Press and hold MENU to
access RDS on/off. Use SEL to
toggle RDS on/off. Press MENU
again to access Traffic mode,
Program Type mode or Show Type mode. (MENU must be pressed
within 10 seconds to proceed to the next RDS mode).
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio
broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.
31

USA (fus)
Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press
SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is
broadcasting RDS data). Traffic information is not available in most
U.S. markets.
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a
certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.
Press and hold MENU until RDS XX is shown in the display. Press MENU
until FIND appears in the display. Use SEL to scroll through music types.
Press SEEK or SCAN to search for a station playing the requested music
category.
Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters or music format.
Press and hold MENU until RDS XX is shown in the display Press MENU
until SHOW appears in the display. Use SEL to select NAME or TYPE.
Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU until
compression status is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the
compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed. Press the SEL
control again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed.
Occupancy mode: Press MENU until occupancy mode appears in the
display. Press SEL to select ALL SEATS, DRIVER SEAT or REAR SEATS
occupancy mode.
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press
MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL to toggle
ON/OFF. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in
preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the
system will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume changes automatically and
slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 is
the maximum setting.
Press MENU until SPEED VOL X appears in the display. Then press SEL
to increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the volume setting. The level will
appear in the display.
32

USA (fus)
Folder/Track Mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in
the display. Use SEL to toggle between FOLDER (only tracks within
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are
accessible) MODE.
10. REPEAT: Repeats current
CD/MP3 track when active (ON).
Press to show repeat status. Press
again to toggle status.
11. SHUFFLE: Plays CD/MP3
tracks in random order when active
(ON). Press to show shuffle status.
Press again to toggle status.
the next MP3 directory.

the previous MP3 directory.
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD mode,

press until desired selection is
reached.
15. REW(Rewind): In CD mode,
press until desired selection is
reached.
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite Ready
capability. The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite
17. BAND: Press to toggle between
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

station: Select frequency band, tune
to a station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
33

USA (fus)
20. Load: Press to load a CD. Press

LOAD and a memory preset to load
to a specific disc slot. Press and
hold to load up to six discs.
21. CD: Press to enter CD mode.

CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.
23. Disc/Tune: Press or to
manually tune down/up the radio frequency band, or to listen to the

previous/next CD.
to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed
Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer
installed satellite kit only available in the continental United States.
www.siriusradio.com
24. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side up.
34

USA (fus)
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES). Refer to the DVD Supplement Guide for further information on
your system.
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
35

USA (fus)
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
36

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air
through the instrument panel registers to cool the vehicle. This mode is
noisier than other modes, but is more economical and efficient and may
help prevent undesirable odors from entering the vehicle.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
3. A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel register vents only.
4. Rear defroster: Clears ice and fog from the rear window.
5. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
air flow selector in the O (OFF) position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
37

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance in panel ( ) mode:
• Select MAX A/C mode. MAX A/C uses recirculated air with A/C to
provide a cooler airflow.
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust in order to
maintain comfort.
To allow side window defogging and demisting while warming up the
vehicle cabin:
1. Select .
2. Select A/C.
3. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows. To
increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
38

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) system (if equipped)
14 15 16 17 1 2 3
EXT
A/C
F F
F C
DUAL
AUTO OFF R
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4
1. A/C control: Uses outside air to A/C

cool the vehicle. Press to turn on/off
in all modes except or .
2. Recirculation control: Cools
the vehicle more quickly by
recirculating the cabin air instead of
using outside air and helps prevent unpleasant outside odors or fumes
from entering the vehicle. Press to turn on/off.
3. Passenger side temperature
control: Controls the temperature
on the passenger side of the vehicle
when in dual zone mode. To enter
dual zone, press the passenger temperature control or DUAL. The
passenger temperature will appear in the display.
4. Rear defroster control:
Removes ice and fog from the rear R
window. Press to turn on/off.

5. DUAL (Single/dual electric DUAL
temperature control): Allows the

driver to have full control of the
cabin temperature settings (single zone) or allows the passenger to have
control of their individual temperature settings (dual zone control). Press
to enable turn on dual zone mode, press again to return to single zone.
39

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
6. : Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
7. : Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents
and floor vents.
8. : Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
9. : Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and
the floor vents.
10. : Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and OFF
the fan will not operate.
12. AUTO: Press to select the AUTO

desired temperature shown in the
display window. The system will
automatically determine the fan speed, airflow location, outside or
recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to the selected temperature.
13. Manual override controls: OFF
Allows you to manually determine
where airflow is directed. To return
to fully automatic control, press AUTO.
14. Driver’s side temperature
control: Controls the temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle.
15. Fan Speed: Used to manually
enable or disable the fan speed.
16. EXT: Displays the outside air EXT
temperature. It will remain

displayed until the EXT control is
pressed again. The external temperature will be most accurate when the
vehicle has been moving for a period of time.
17. Temperature conversion: FC
Press to toggle between Fahrenheit

and Celsius temperature on the
DATC display only. The set point temperatures in Celsius will be
displayed in half-degree increments.
40

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance:
• Select and A/C and recirculated air. Use recirculated air with A/C to
provide a cooler airflow.
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
To allow side window defogging and demisting while warming up the
vehicle cabin:
1. Select .
2. Select A/C.
3. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows. To
increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
41

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Auxiliary system (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary climate controls. These
allow the front or rear seat passengers to control airflow direction,
temperature and fan level of the rear compartment to quickly heat or
cool the entire vehicle.
Front auxiliary controls:
1. Temperature control: Determines temperature level. If the main

climate control system is cooling in MAX A/C or mode, the
auxiliary controls will not function as the entire vehicle will operate at a
full cool temperature.
2. Mode selector: Press to select air flow direction to (Floor)
or (Panel).
Directs air to the floor of the third row seating.
directs air to the overhead registers of the second and third row
seating. The selected mode will illuminate on the temperature control.
3. Fan control: Determines fan speed levels. Turn to REAR (if
equipped) to give rear seat passengers control of the rear auxiliary
controls. Otherwise, the front controls will determine the settings for the
entire vehicle cabin. If set to O (OFF), the front and rear auxiliary
controls will not function.
Rear auxiliary controls (if equipped):
Once the front auxiliary control is set to REAR, the rear seat passengers
may use the rear auxiliary controls in the overhead console to make the
desired adjustments.
42

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
1. Temperature control: 3 1
Determines temperature levels. If
the main climate control system is 0 1
2
cooling in MAX A/C or mode, 3
4
the auxiliary controls will not
function as the entire vehicle will
operate at a full cool temperature.
2. Mode selector: Press to select 2
between air flow to (Floor)
or (Panel).
Directs air to the floor of the third row seating.
directs air to the overhead registers of the second and third row
seating. The selected mode will illuminate on the temperature control.
3. Fan control: Determines fan speed levels.
Floor console climate controls (if equipped)
Controls the direction of the airflow
to the rear of the vehicle.
selects air flow from the console
panel registers. selects air flow
from the floor console registers.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

The rear defroster control is located
on the instrument panel.
Press the rear defroster control to
clear the rear window of thin ice
and fog. R
• A small LED will illuminate when
the rear defroster is activated.
The ignition must be in the 3 (ON) position to operate the rear window
defroster.
The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the
ignition is turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position. To manually turn off
the defroster before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again.
43

USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
A
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Autolamp system
The autolamp system sets the headlamps to turn on and off
automatically. The autolamp control, located on the headlamp control,
may be set to:
• turn on the lamps automatically at night
• turn off the lamps automatically during the daylight
• keep the lamps on for up to three minutes after the key is turned to
OFF.
To turn the autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise to .
Foglamp control
The foglamps can be turned on only
when the headlamp control is in A
the , and position and

the high beams are not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
indicator light will illuminate
when foglamp is activated.
Push the headlamp control towards the instrument panel to deactivate
the foglamps.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
To activate DRL:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control is in the or position
• the parking brake must be disengaged.
44

USA (fus)
Lights
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during

inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System
does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
INT2
INT1
OFF
OFF
Flash to pass
Pull the lever toward you to
activate. Release the lever to INT2
deactivate. INT1
OFF
OFF
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL

Move the control up and down to
adjust the intensity of the panel A
lighting. Operates only when the

exterior lights are switched on.
Move the control to the full upright
position (past detent) to turn on the
interior lamps.
Move the control to the full down
position (past detent) to prevent interior lamps from illuminating when
the doors are opened.
45

USA (fus)
Lights
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed before leaving the
assembly plant. If your vehicle is involved in an accident or if you have
problems fixing the alignment of your headlamps, have them checked by
a qualified service technician.
Headlamp aim adjustment

The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away
from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at
night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern.
• (1) Eight feet
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) Twenty-five feet
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. The center of the headlamp has a
3.0 mm circle on the lens. Measure
the height from the center of your
headlamp to the ground (2) and
mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long
horizontal line on the plain surface (1) at this height (masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps.
The brightest part of the light
should be below the horizontal line
(4). If it is above the line the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
4. Open the hood.
46

USA (fus)
Lights
5. Locate the vertical adjuster for
each headlamp. Adjust the aim by
turning the adjuster control either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
Note: Use a 4 mm socket or box
wrench to turn the vertical adjuster
control.
6. Horizontal aiming is not required
for this vehicle and is
non-adjustable.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL

• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INT2
INT1
OFF
OFF
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome/reading lamps
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
The reading portion, the two outer lights, can only be toggled on and off
at the lamp.
47

USA (fus)
Lights
Cargo/reading lamps
The dome portion of the lamp or
the center light can be turned on
when the headlamp control is
rotated fully up or when a door is
opened.
With the ignition in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can be
turned ON or OFF by sliding the control.
BULBS
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Replacing exterior bulbs

Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing the interior bulbs

Check the operation of the bulbs frequently. To replace any of the
interior bulbs, see a dealer or qualified technician.
Using the right bulbs

Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. Using incorrect bulbs may damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty or may not provide quality bulb burn
time.
48

USA (fus)
Lights
Function Number of bulbs Trade number

Park/turn lamps 2
3157 AK (amber)
(front)
Headlamps 2 9007
Rear stop/turn/tail 4
3057
lamps
Rear license plate 2
168
lamps
Backup lamp 2 3156K
High-mount brake 5
W5W
lamps
Side mounted turn 2
WY5W (amber)
signal
Front sidemarker 2 194
Rear sidemarker 2 194
Fog lamp 2 9145
Cargo lamp 1 211-2
Interior overhead lamp 1 912 (906)
Front door courtesy 1
168
lamp
Map lamps 2 168 (T10)
Ashtray lamp 1 161
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer.
49

USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing headlamp bulbs
Do not touch the glass of a halogen bulb.
1. Turn off the headlamps and open
the hood.
2. Remove the two retainer pins,
then pull headlamp forward.
3. Disconnect the electrical

connector.
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring.
50

USA (fus)
Lights
5. Carefully pull the old bulb out of
the lamp assembly.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of

children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Reverse steps to reinstall bulb(s).
Replacing front parking/turn signal bulbs

1. Turn OFF the headlamps and
open the hood.
2. Remove the two headlamp
retainer pins, then pull the
headlamp forward.
51

USA (fus)
Lights
3. Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pull the old bulb out of
the lamp assembly.
Replacing side-mounted turn signal bulbs

1. Turn the headlamp switch to off.
2. Carefully pry the lamp assembly
away from the fender.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it from
the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out.
52

USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing front/rear side marker bulbs
1. Turn the headlamp switch to off.
2. Reach under the bumper and
rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it.
3. Pull the bulb straight out.
Replacing tail/brake/turn/backup lamp bulbs

1. Turn the headlamp switch to OFF
and open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws from the
lamp assembly.
3. Remove the lamp assembly.
4. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it
from the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Replacing foglamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the plastic splash shield
by removing the two screws on the
front of the fenderwell.
foglamp by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
53

USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then
remove two screws and the license
plate lamp assembly.
lamp assembly by turning
counterclockwise and pull the bulb
straight out.

Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulb
1. Remove the two screws and lamp
assembly from vehicle.
lamp assembly by depressing the
snaps and pull the bulb straight out.
54

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers; INT2
rotate towards you to decrease the INT1

OFF
OFF
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When
the wiper control is on, the speed of
the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk: INT2
INT1
OFF
• briefly: causes a single swipe of OFF
the wipers without washer fluid.

• a quick push and hold: the wipers will swipe three times with washer
fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Rear window wiper/washer controls

For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
INT2
Select: INT1
OFF
OFF
INT 1 — 3–4 second interval rear
wiper.
INT 2 — 8–10 second interval rear
wiper.
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
control to either position.
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2
or OFF position.
55

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once
per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can sometimes
be improved by cleaning the wiper
blades, refer to Windows and
wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
TILT STEERING COLUMN

Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column. While the lever is
in the down position, tilt the
steering column to its desired
orientation.
56

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Lift the lever back to its original
position to lock the steering column.
Never adjust the steering
column when the vehicle is
moving.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a

variety of console features. These
include:
• Utility compartment with
cassette/compact disc storage
• Auxiliary power point
• Cupholders
• Tissue box holder (located on underside of console lid)
• Ash tray (if equipped)
The rear side of the console may incorporate the following features:
• Air vents
• Cupholders (will pull up with break away feature)
• Rear power point
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
Cell phone use

The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
57

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.

The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
Rear center console features (if equipped)

The rear center console incorporates the following features:
• Utility compartment
• Cupholders
• Flip forward armrest to provide a
flat load floor
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)

The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
58

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Storage compartment
Press the latch to open the storage
compartment.
Installing a garage door opener (if equipped)

The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of
aftermarket garage door openers:
• Place the VELCRO威 hook onto
the side of the aftermarket
transmitter opposite of the
button.
• Place the transmitter into storage
compartment, button down.
• Place the provided height

adaptors onto the back of the
door as needed.
• Close the door.
• Press the depression in the door
to activate the transmitter.
59

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Illuminated visor mirror
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
Slide on rod feature

Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
in the floor console.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VDC/180W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
60

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Rear auxiliary power point (if equipped)

A second auxiliary power point is located on the rear side of the console.
It is accessible from the rear seats.
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the bottom part of

the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
One touch down

Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
AUTO and release quickly. Press
again to stop.
61

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control. Press the right
side to restore the window controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches, audio system and moon roof
may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
the OFF position or until any door is opened.
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS

The ignition must be in the ACC or ON position to adjust the power side
view mirrors.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
lock mirrors in place.
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)

Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause
damage to the glass and mirrors.
62

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
Automatic dimming rear view mirror

Your vehicle may be equipped with
an inside rear view mirror with an
auto-dimming feature. When the
auto-dimming mirror is turned on,
as indicated by an illuminated green
LED to the left of the button on
mirror, it will detect bright
lights(glare) from behind the vehicle, and will change from the normal,
high reflective state, to the darkened state to minimize glare.
When the auto-dimming mirror is turned on, it will automatically return
to the normal, high reflective, state whenever the vehicle is placed in R
(Reverse) to ensure a clear view while backing up.
Do not block the sensor located to the right of the mirror button or the
sensor located on the back side of the mirror as this may impair mirror
performance.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)

The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal
toward you or away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 3 inches (71–76 mm) of

maximum travel.
63

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control

The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and

release it.
RES
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
SET
+
5. The indicator light on the
instrument cluster will turn on. COAST
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
64

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES (resume) control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously RES
set speed. The RES control will not

work if the vehicle speed is not SET
+
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).
COAST
Increasing speed while using speed control

There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
RES
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
SET
speed, then release the control. +
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up COAST
function. Press and release this

control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control

There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
RES
• Press and hold the COAST/CST
control until you get to the
SET
desired speed, then release the +
control. You can also use the
COAST/CST control to operate COAST
the Tap-Down function. Press and

release this control to decrease
the vehicle set speed in small
amounts by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
65

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET + control. RES
SET
+
COAST
Turning off speed control

There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will not erase your vehicle’s previously
set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)

These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
66

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Audio control features
Press to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2,
• CD (if equipped), or
• DVD (if equipped).
In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:

• Press MEM to select preset
stations within the selected radio
band.
In CD mode:
• Press MEM to select the next
selection on the CD.
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or − to adjust
volume.
67

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Climate control features
Press TMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
Press + or - to adjust fan speed.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

You can move the glass panel of the moon roof back to open or tilt up to
ventilate the vehicle.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
68

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To open the moon roof:
The moon roof is equipped with an
automatic, one-touch, express
opening feature. Press and release
the rear portion of the control. To
stop motion at any time during the
one-touch opening, press the control
again.
To close the moon roof:
Press and hold the front portion of
the control until the glass panel
stops moving. Once fully closed, the rear of the glass panel will appear
higher than the front edge.
To vent:
To tilt the moon roof into the vent position (when the glass panel is
closed), press and hold the front portion of the control. To close the
moon roof from the vent position, press and hold the rear portion of the
control until the glass panel stops moving.
If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is installed,
the moon roof needs to be opened to the vent position to reset the moon
roof positions.
The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be opened or closed when
the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the
vehicle.
When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the moon roof opening.
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The HomeLink威 Wireless Control System, located on the overhead
console, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio
frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
69

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
second (or “ACC”) position for programming and/or operation of the
HomeLink威. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not repeat Step 1
to program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink威 buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink威.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
(located on your overhead console) while keeping the indicator light in
view.
70

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release
the buttons until Step 4 has
been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door
openers may require you to replace
Step 3 with procedures noted in the
“Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” section for Canadian
residents.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons when the indicator light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light
indicates acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency
signals.)
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button and observe the
indicator light. If the light is constant, programming is complete and your
device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
begin with Step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat Step 1.
Note: If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a continuous light, proceed with Steps 6 through 8 to complete
programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLink威 button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
71

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace Step 3 with the
following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 4 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System

To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the
event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
72

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
2 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
ELECTRONIC COMPASS/TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
Outside air temperature
The outside temperature display is
contained in the instrument cluster
and displays all the time. If
equipped with the DATC climate
control system, the outside
temperature will be displayed there.
For more information, refer to Dual
automatic temperature control (DATC) in the Climate Controls
chapter
To turn the display off or change the display from English to metric see
your dealer.
73

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Compass
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antennas.
Magnetic or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also
affect compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration adjustment
in this section.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment in this section.
Compass zone adjustment

1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone 3 2 1 15
map.
4 14
2. Turn ignition to the ON position.
13
5
12
6 7 8 9 1011
3. Locate compass sensor mounted
at base of mirror.
4. Press the button on the top of
the compass module until ZONE
appears in the instrument cluster
display.
5. Release pressure on the button and then slowly press it down again.
74

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
6. Continue to press until ZONE
display, then release. The display
should show the current zone
number.
7. Press until the desired zone
number appears. The display will flash and then return to normal
operation. The zone is now updated.
Compass calibration adjustment

Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines:
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Locate compass sensor mounted at base of mirror.
3. Press the button on the top of
the compass module until ZONE
display. Continue to hold down until
ZONE disappears and CAL is
displayed (approximately eight
seconds) and release.
4. Drive the vehicle slowly (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles until
CAL indicator turns off (4–5 complete circles).
5. The compass is now calibrated.
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the ON position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message center for a display of status preceded
by a brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of potential
vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long
indicator chime.
75

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer/Compass
• Trip odometer/Odometer/Compass
• Average Fuel Economy
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time
• Distance to Empty
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Compass display
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment in this section.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
76

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment in this section.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Turn ignition to the ON position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
4. From Info menu, select the 3 2 1 15
Compass/Odometer function. (Do 4
not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The 14
top of the message center must be 13
blank). 5
12
6 7 8 9 1011
5. Press and hold the RESET and

SETUP control until the message
center display changes to show the
current zone setting.
6. Release the RESET AND SETUP

control, then slowly press RESET
down again.
7. Press the SETUP control
repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center.
To exit the zone setting mode press and release the RESET control.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
77

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE indicator changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED. This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
10. The compass is now calibrated.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/U.S. gallon or
liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing gallons of fuel used by 100 miles traveled
(kilometers traveled by liters used), your figure may be different than
displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
Average fuel economy for FFV-equipped vehicles
Upon refueling, your vehicle needs to determine the percentage of
Ethanol in the fuel. For the first several minutes, or few miles of driving,
the message “COMPUTING FUEL” may appear in the message center.
The correct fuel economy will appear in the message center following
calculation.
78

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for
one second when you have approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If
you RESET this warning message, this display and tone will return
within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Distance to empty for FFV-equipped vehicles
Upon refueling, your vehicle needs to determine the percentage of
Ethanol in the fuel. For the first several minutes, or few miles of driving,
the message “COMPUTING FUEL” may appear in the message center.
The correct distance to empty will appear in the message center
following calculation.
79

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Autolock
• Easy Entry/Exit
• Autolamp Delay
• Oil Change
• Language
• AWD Lock (vehicles equipped with AdvanceTrac娂 with RSC only)
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for three seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. FUEL LEVEL
2. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
3. OIL LIFE IN XX%
4. ADVTRAC
5. ENGINE TEMP
6. OIL PRESSURE
7. TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM (if equipped)
8. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
9. CHARGING SYSTEM
80

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Autolocks
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolocks ON or OFF.
Easy entry/exit (if equipped)
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry/exit feature ON or
OFF. For more information refer to Memory Seat/Adjustable
Pedals/Easy entry/exit feature in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter.
Autolamp delay
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select
the autolamp delay time.
Oil Change
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to reset
oil change.
81

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Language
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control

cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
3. Press and hold the RESET

control to set the language choice.
AWD lock (vehicles equipped with AdvanceTrac姟 with RSC only)

Select this function from the SETUP menu to display the AWD locked
function.
1. Press the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control within 4

seconds to turn the AWD system to
the LOCKED mode.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
82

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will reappear on the display every minute from the reset.
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warning display Status
Temporary AWD lock (vehicles Displays for 4 seconds
equipped with AdvanceTrac威
only)
AWD lock OFF AWD auto ON
(vehicles equipped with
AdvanceTrac威 only)
Check engine temperature Warning returns after 10 minutes
Transmission overheated
Check transmission
Low fuel level
Check fuel cap
Check charging system
Low brake fluid level
Low oil pressure
Warning-tire very low (if
equipped)
ETC-engine failsafe mode
AWD disabled lock (vehicles
with RSC only)
83

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Warning display Status

Check tire pressure (if Warning returns after the ignition key
equipped) is turned from OFF to ON.
Tire pressure monitor fault (if
equipped)
Tire pressure sensor fault (if
equipped)
Check AdvanceTrac威 (if
equipped)
Check AWD (vehicles equipped
with AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
only)
AWD Disabled (vehicles
with RSC only)
Low washer fluid level
Door ajar
Change oil soon
Oil change required
TEMPORARY AWD LOCK (vehicles equipped with AdvanceTrac威
with RSC only). Displayed when the AWD system automatically locks
to prevent damage from overheating.
AWD LOCK OFF and AWD AUTO ON (vehicles equipped with
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC only). Displayed when the AWD system is
completely cooled down from being overheated.
CHECK ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the engine
coolant is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn
off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as
soon as possible.
TRANSMISSION OVERHEATED. Indicates the transmission is
overheating. This warning may appear when towing heavy loads or when
driving in a low gear at a high speed for an extended period of time.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine and let it
cool. Refer to Transmission fluid in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your dealer for transmission service as soon as possible.
84

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CHECK TRANSMISSION. Indicates the transmission is not operating
properly. If this warning stays on, contact your dealer as soon as
possible.
AWD DISABLED LOCK (vehicles equipped with AdvanceTrac威
with RSC only). Displayed when the AWD system begins to overheat
placing itself in the autolock mode. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your dealer as soon as safely possible.
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
ETC-ENGINE FAILSAFE MODE. Displayed when the engine has
defaulted to a “limp-home” operation. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM. Displayed when the electrical system is
not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical accessories
when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of the
electrical loads as possible. If the warning stays on or comes on when the
engine is operating at normal speeds, have the electrical system checked
as soon as possible.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
LOW OIL PRESSURE. Displayed when the engine oil level is low. If
this warning message is displayed, check the level of the engine oil.
Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
information about adding engine oil.
WARNING-TIRE VERY LOW (if equipped). Displayed when one or
more road tires on your vehicle have very low pressure. When this
warning message is displayed, a warning chime will sound reminding you
to stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible to check your tires for
proper air pressure, leaks and damage. Refer to Inspecting and
Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped).Displayed when one or more
tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inspecting and
Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT (if equipped). Displayed when
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, have the system inspected by your
servicing dealership.
85

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT (if equipped). Displayed when a
tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For
more information on how the system operates under these conditions,
refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your servicing
dealership.
LOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is
less than one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to
Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
CHECK ADVANCETRAC威 (if equipped). Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system is not operating properly. If this message
is displayed on the message center the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system
will be partially operable. If this warning stays on while the engine is
running, contact your dealer for service as soon as possible. For further
information, refer to AdvanceTrac威 stability enhancement system in
the Driving chapter.
AWD DISABLED (vehicles equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
only). Displayed for 4 seconds then SEE OWNER’S MANUAL will
display indicating that the AWD system is not operating properly. For
further information, refer to Disabling AWD in the Driving chapter. See
your dealer as soon as possible
CHECK AWD (vehicles equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with RSC
only). Displayed when the AWD system is not operating properly. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer
immediately.
DOOR AJAR. Displayed when a door or liftgate is not completely
closed.
CHANGE OIL SOON/OIL CHANGE REQUIRED. Displayed when the
engine oil life remaining is 5 percent or less. When oil life left is between
5% and 0%, the CHANGE OIL SOON message will be displayed. When oil
life left reaches 0%, the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be
displayed.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
86

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
[approximately 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 180 days] perform the
following:
1. Press and release the SETUP
control to display “PRESS RESET
AT OIL CHANGE”.
2. Press and release the RESET

control to display “HOLD RESET
TO CONFIRM”.
3. Press and hold the RESET

control for 2 seconds and release.
Oil life is set to 100% and “OIL LIFE
SET TO 100%” is displayed.
After you have done steps 1 through 3, you can reset the oil
monitoring system to your personalized oil life %:
4. Press RESET and SETUP
controls at the same time for 2
seconds, to activate a service mode
which will display “OIL LIFE XX%
RESET TO ALTER”.
5. Press RESET to decrement oil life by 10% down to 30% and back to
100%.
6. With your personalized OIL LIFE XX% displayed, press SETUP to
continue the system check.
DATA ERR. These messages indicate improper operation of the vehicle
network communication between electronic modules.
• Fuel computer
• Oil life
• Charging system
• Door sensor
• Washer fluid
• Brake fluid
87

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Compass
• Outside temperature
• Engine sensor
Contact your dealer as soon as possible if these messages occur on a
regular basis.
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT
Position the driver floor mat so that
the eyelet is over the pointed end of
the retention post and rotate
forward to lock in. Make sure that
the mat does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator or the
brake pedal. To remove the floor
mat, reverse the installation
procedure.
REAR LIFTGATE
The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers. You can open
and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. It cannot be opened from
inside the cargo area.
• To open the liftgate window,
press the control on the remote
entry transmitter or, with the
liftgate unlocked, push the
control button on the right side
under the license plate lamp
shield.
• To open the liftgate, unlock the
liftgate (with the power door
locks, the remote entry or the
keyless entry pad) and pull the
middle lever under the license plate lamp shield.
To lock the liftgate and the liftgate window, use the power door locks or
press the door lock switch on the left side of the cargo area. To manually
lock or unlock the liftgate, move the button located below the window
down or up.
88

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The liftgate door and window should be closed before driving. If not,
possible damage may occur to your vehicle.
Always close liftgate window before opening liftgate. Liftgate
glass and liftgate should never be open at the same time. Failure
to observe this warning may result in personal injury or damage to
your vehicle.
Make sure the liftgate door and/or window are closed to prevent
exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also
reduce the risk of passengers and cargo falling out.
CARGO COVER (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo area cover that covers the
luggage compartment of your vehicle.
To install the cover:
Push both ends of the cover into the
depressions (right side first) in the
trim panels behind the second row
seat.
To reduce the risk of
injuries, the cargo area
cover must be properly installed
on the rear trim panels.
Do not place any objects on the cargo area cover. They may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of the vehicle in the
case of a sudden stop or collision.
Cargo management system

The cargo management system consists of storage compartments located
in the floor of the rear cargo area.
89

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
7 passenger stowage:
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid.
2. To close, lower the lid, lift the
release handle and press down on
the lid.
5 passenger stowage:
When the lid is open, it will stand
up on its own.
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid.
2. To close, lower the lid, lift the
release handle and press down on
the lid.
LUGGAGE RACK
The maximum recommended load is
200 lbs (90 kg), evenly distributed.
If it is not possible to distribute the
load, position it as far rearward as
possible. Use the tie down loops (on
the thumbwheels) to secure the
load.
90

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To adjust cross-bar position (if
equipped):
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the desired
location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and

four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sport cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increase risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
91

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
One key operates all the locks and starts the vehicle. Always carry a
spare key with you in case of an emergency.
Your keys are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied
keys, replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.
Refer to the SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system section later in this
chapter for more information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS

Press control to unlock all vehicle
doors.
Press control to lock all vehicle

doors.
Liftgate
An additional power door lock can be accessed by opening the liftgate.
The button is located either on the top of the left-hand quarter trim
panel underneath the rear window, or on the bottom of the left-hand
quarter trim panel. Press this button to lock or unlock all the doors.
Smart unlocking feature

The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out
of the vehicle. With the key in any ignition position, the driver’s door will
automatically unlock if it is locked using the power lock control on the
driver’s door panel while the driver’s door is open.
92

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Childproof door locks
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock.
• Move control down to disengage childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
93

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The remote entry system allows you
to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
and liftgate and open the liftgate
window without a key.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position.

The liftgate glass feature operates as long as the vehicle’s speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). The panic feature operates with the key in the 1
(OFF/LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position.
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership, to
aid in troubleshooting.
Unlocking the doors

1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
doors.
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature. This
feature turns on the interior lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is
turned to the 3 (ON) position. If the dome lamp control is in the off
position the illuminated entry feature will not work.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on using the dimmer control or
• any door is open.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 30 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
Locking the doors/liftgate

1. Press and release to lock all the doors and liftgate. The lamps will
flash. Note: If any door, the liftgate or the liftgate glass are not closed
properly, the lamps will not flash.
94

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
2. Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn
will chirp and the lamps flash once.
Note: If any door, the liftgate or the liftgate glass are not closed
properly, the horn will make two quick chirps.
Opening the liftgate window
Press to unlatch the liftgate window.
Sounding a panic alarm

Press to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the parklamps
will flash for a maximum of 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to
the 3 (ON) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3
minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(OFF/LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position.
Memory seats/adjustable pedals/easy entry-exit feature
(if equipped)
The remote entry system can also control the memory seat /adjustable
pedals/easy entry-exit feature.
Press to automatically move the seat and adjustable pedals to the
desired memory position (the seat position corresponds to the
transmitter being used).
Activating the memory seat feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat and adjustable pedals to the position desired.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press one SET
control on the remote transmitter
and then press the 1 or 2 control on
the driver’s door panel to which you
would like to associate with the seat
and Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions.
1 2
4. Repeat this procedure for another
remote transmitter if desired.
95

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Deactivating the memory seat feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
2. Within 5 five seconds, press any control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on
the driver’s door panel.
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the

battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
96

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure. If all remote entry transmitters
are not present during the programming procedure, the transmitters that
are not present during programming will no longer operate the vehicle.
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters: 3
2
4
1. Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.

2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Turn the key from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to 3 (ON).
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position and 3 (ON). Note: The eighth turn must end in
the 3 (ON) position.
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
97

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
9. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position after you have
finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (ON) position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• open the liftgate window.
• activate or deactivate the
autolock feature.
The keypad can be operated with
the factory set 5–digit entry code;
this code is located on the owner’s
wallet card in the glove box, is
marked on the computer module,
and is available from your
authorized dealer. You can also
create your own 5–digit personal
entry code. In the event the wallet card is lost, the factory set code
cannot be reprogrammed.
98

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal
keycode has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
• If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the UNLOCK control on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (ON) position.
Unlocking and locking the doors, liftgate and liftgate window using
keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate.
99

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
To unlock all doors and liftgate, press the 3 • 4 control within five
seconds.
To open the liftgate window, press the 5 • 6 control within five
seconds.
To lock all doors, liftgate and liftgate window, press the 7 • 8 and
the 9 • 0 at the same time. Note: The driver’s door must be closed. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first.
Autolock
The autolock feature will lock all the doors, liftgate and liftgate window
when:
• all the doors, the liftgate and liftgate window are closed,
• the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the brake pedal is released and the vehicle attains a speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door, liftgate or liftgate window is opened then closed while the
ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, and
• you put the vehicle in motion by releasing the brake pedal and the
vehicle attains a speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature activated. There are four
methods to enable/disable this feature: One is through your dealer, the
second with a power door unlock/lock sequence, the third with the
keypad, and the fourth by using the message center (if equipped).
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
that the anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is off, and all vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed.
100

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Power door unlock/lock procedure
You must complete steps 1-5 within
30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the
procedure needs to be repeated,
you must wait 30 seconds.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (ON) position. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position. The horn will chirp
once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and liftgate window.
3. Enter 5–digit entry code
4. Press and hold the 7 • 8. While holding the 7 • 8 press the 3 • 4.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
6. Release the 7 • 8.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Message center procedure
For information on activating/deactivating the autolock feature using the
vehicle’s message center (if equipped), refer to Message center
information in the Driver Controls chapter.
101

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
SECURILOCK姟 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your dealer. The dealer can program your spare keys to
your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to
Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded
key.
Note: The SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Theft indicator
The theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel.
• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock娂 system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock娂 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
102

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 2 3
(ACCESSORY) position.
2
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds when the vehicle is 4
armed.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
• The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
• If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or
flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealer.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to a dealership. The key codes
need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle.
Tips:
• A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
• Only use SecuriLock娂 keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
103

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin. 3
1. Insert the first previously 2
programmed coded key into the
ignition. 4
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON)

position. Keep the ignition in the 3 (ON) position for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the first
coded key from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
second previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds turning the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the
new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
seconds but not more than 10 seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off, and
you may repeat Steps 1 through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle
to your dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait twenty seconds
and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
104

USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Adjustable head restraints

Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.
The seats in your vehicle have adjustable head restraints. Adjust your
head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind
your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
105

USA (fus)
Push control to lower head restraint.
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Lift handle to move seat forward or

backward.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
106

USA (fus)
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press one side of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the other side of the control
to adjust softness.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)

The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion.
107

USA (fus)
Press front to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.
Press rear to raise or lower the rear

portion of the seat cushion.
Press the control to move the seat

forward, backward, up or down.
Memory seat/adjustable pedals/easy entry-exit feature (if equipped)

This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat to
three programmable positions. SET
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat to the desired 1 2
position using the seat controls.
Press the SET control. The SET
control indicator light will briefly
illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
• To program position three, push buttons 1 and 2 simultaneously.
108

USA (fus)
A position can only be set or recalled when the transmission gearshift is
in P (Park) or N (Neutral). A memory seat position may be programmed
at any time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control.
The third position is recalled when both buttons are depressed.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Memory seat/adjustable pedals/easy entry-exit feature (if equipped)
in the Locks and Security chapter.
The easy entry/exit feature automatically moves the drivers seat
backwards slightly (if room is available) when the key is removed from
the ignition. It will automatically move the seat forward to the original
position when the key is inserted into the ignition.
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)

For more lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
front of vehicle.
For less lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
rear of vehicle.
109

USA (fus)
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats:
• Push control located on the seat
to activate.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seat icon in the Dual

Automatic Temperature Control
(DATC) will illuminate when
activated.
REAR SEATS
Folding down the 60/40 rear
seats (if equipped)
If the rear seat is equipped with
adjustable head restraints, they
should be placed in the full down
position before folding the seat back
down.
110

USA (fus)
1. Pull upward on the release handle
to cycle the seats to the load-floor
position.
2. Rotate the seatback downward
into the load floor position.
3. Press down on the top outboard
area of the seatback until a click is
heard. The seat is now latched in
the floor position.
To return the seat to the upright position:

• Pull the release handle upward to unlatch the seat.
• Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches in the upright
position. The seatback will click when it is locked into position.
Folding down the 40/20/40 rear seats or bucket seats

Ensure that the headrest is in the down position and no objects such as
books, purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row
seats before folding them down.
Move front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat headrest
clears the front seat.
For assistance, refer to the label located on the lower position of the
opening.
1. Locate handle on the side of the
seat cushion by the door.
2. Pull forward on the upper portion
of the release handle and push the
seatback toward the front of the
vehicle.
heard.
Adjusting the 2nd row recline

The 2nd row reclines for additional comfort. To adjust the 2nd row
recline, pull the handle forward and push the seat back rearward.
111

USA (fus)
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the

seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Operating the 2nd row seat for E-Z Entry (if equipped)
The E-Z Entry seat allows for easier entry and exit to and from the 3rd
row seat.
To enter the 3rd row seat:
1. Fold down the 2nd row seat.
2. Push the handle all the way
forward until the seat releases from
the floor.
3. Push the seat upward and fold
away from the third row.
Always return the seat to the fully latched position before

operating the vehicle.
To return the seat to a seating

position:
1. Push the seat down and latch to
the floor with a moderate amount of
effort and speed.
2. Make sure the seat is latched to
the floor.
3. Push the handle forward just
enough so that the seat back is
released.
4. Bring the seat back to an upright position. The seatback should lock
into position.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
112

USA (fus)
Note: If the seat back is “locked out” and cannot return to the upright
position, repeat Step 2 and unlatch the seat from the floor. Repeat
latching to the floor with a moderate amount of force and momentum.
Your seats are equipped with an Interlock Safety Mechanism which will
not allow the seats to return to a usable position if the seat is not fully
latched to the floor!
To exit the 3rd row seat, pull the
red access control lever up releasing
the seat from the floor and rotate
the seat up towards the front seat.
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
113

USA (fus)
Folding the middle 2nd row seat (If equipped)
To fold the seatback down:
1. Locate the lever on the top left of
the seatback.
2. Pull the lever up and push the
seatback toward the front of the
vehicle.
heard.
To return the seatback to the

upright position:
1. Pull the lever and lift the
seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
Before returning the
seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or
any objects are not trapped
underneath the seatback. After
returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of
a sudden stop or collision.
114

USA (fus)
Second row center seat storage space (if equipped)
Storage space is provided
underneath the 40/20/40 second row
center seat. To access the storage
space pull up on the strap.
Third row seat (if equipped)
3rd row stow feature

The 3rd row seat has a tip/stow feature to increase cargo space without
removing the seat from the vehicle.
Lower the head restraints before putting the seat in the stowed position.
To put seat in stowed position:
1. Pull the seat release lever located
on top of the seatback while
pushing the seatback down onto the
seat cushion.
2. The seatback will latch into place.
115

USA (fus)
3. Push the closeout panel forward
over the space between the seats.
To put seat in upright position:

1. Pull back the slider panel on the
seatback to release the closeout
panel.
2. Pull the seat release lever located

on top of the seatback while lifting
the seatback into the upright
position.
3. The seatback will latch into place.
The third row seat is equipped with combination lap and shoulder belts
in both seating positions. For information on the proper operation of the
safety restraints, refer to Safety restraints in this chapter.
116

USA (fus)
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure

that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System姟
The Personal Safety System娂 provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System娂 consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM).
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System姟 work?
The Personal Safety System娂 can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System娂 determined
117

USA (fus)
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System娂 to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System娂 to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System娂 to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety restraints section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers when the
vehicle is equipped with the Safety Canopy娂 system. This maximizes the
effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient
severity, together with the front airbags.
118

USA (fus)
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Safety restraints section in
this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System姟 is operational
The Personal Safety System娂 uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System娂 is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following:
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System娂 serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician
immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in
the event of a collision.
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
119

USA (fus)
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt

assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Energy Management Feature

• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a head-on collision.
120

USA (fus)
• This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner. This helps
reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace
the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Combination lap and shoulder belts

1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
• Front and rear seats
2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
• Front and rear seats
121

USA (fus)
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a
passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety
seats for children later in this chapter.
122

USA (fus)
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and

pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode

Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
123

USA (fus)
After any vehicle collision, the combination lap and shoulder belt
system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”
feature for child seats is still functioning properly, in addition to other
checks for proper safety belt system function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if

the safety belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly. In addition, all
safety belts should be checked for proper function. Failure to replace
the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner

Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
right front passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner removes some slack from the safety belt
system at the start of a crash. The safety belt pretensioner uses the
same crash sensor system as the front airbags and Safety Canopy娂
system (if equipped). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, the lap
and shoulder belt are tightened.
When the optional Safety Canopy娂 system and/or the front airbags are
activated, the safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt
is properly buckled.
The driver and the right front passenger safety belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags or Safety Canopy娂 and safety belt
pretensioners.
Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter.
124

USA (fus)
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the front and
second row outboard seating
positions.
Adjust the height of the shoulder
belt so the belt rests across the
middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
squeeze the button and slide the
height adjuster up or down. Release
the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly

If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch (20
cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
125

USA (fus)
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light
buckled before the ignition switch illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
is turned to the ON position... warning chime sounds 4-8
seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
while the indicator light is warning chime turn off.
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off.
to the ON position...
BeltMinder姟
The BeltMinder娂 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not The BeltMinder娂 feature is
buckled before the vehicle has activated - the safety belt warning
reached at least 3 mph (5 km/h) light illuminates and the warning
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed chime sounds for 6 seconds every
since the ignition switch has been 30 seconds, repeating for
turned to ON... approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder娂 feature will not
while the safety belt indicator light activate.
is illuminated and the safety belt
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder娂 feature will not
before the ignition switch is turned activate.
to the ON position...
126

USA (fus)
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder娂 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with don’t Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
wear belts” times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
127

USA (fus)
Reasons given... Consider...

“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the
BeltMinder娂 chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the
risk of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the
BeltMinder娂 feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable

Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, the BeltMinder娂 will be disabled for that ignition
cycle only.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder姟 feature
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set
• the gearshift is in P (Park)
• the ignition switch is in the OFF position
• all vehicle doors are closed
• the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
• the parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped
with Autolamps, the Autolamps feature MUST be turned off.)
Read Steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
128

USA (fus)
BeltMinder娂 deactivation/activation procedure
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2
minutes)
• Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated.
3. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three
times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or
during BeltMinder娂 warning activation.
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps.
5. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three
times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled.
• After Step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, at a
moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable BeltMinder娂 if it is currently enabled, or enable
BeltMinder娂 if it is currently disabled.
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder娂 is provided by flashing the
safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds.
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder娂 is provided by flashing the
safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds,
followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then
followed by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second
for three seconds again.
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
129

USA (fus)
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a
qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
130

USA (fus)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)

recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
131

USA (fus)
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag

supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame,

bumper, front end body structure and non-Ford tow hooks may
effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle with anything other
than authorized Ford accessories for your vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag

sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
Children and airbags

Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
132

USA (fus)
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates airbag
inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Front airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
133

USA (fus)
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The SRS consists of:

• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags).
• Safety Canopy娂 system (if equipped). Refer to Safety Canopy娂
system later in this chapter.
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• a readiness light and tone.
• diagnostic module.
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
134

USA (fus)
Safety Canopy姟 system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or

mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy娂. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy娂 could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy娂

system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a
vehicle containing a Safety Canopy娂. See your Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always

wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety
Canopy娂 system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the

deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy娂.
135

USA (fus)
How does the Safety Canopy姟 system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy娂 system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy娂).
The Safety Canopy娂 system
consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of the vehicle).
• A headliner that will flex to open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy娂 deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two side crash sensors mounted at the base of the B-pillar (one on
each side of the vehicle).
• Two side crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors
(one on each side of the vehicle).
• Roll over sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy娂 system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats (if equipped). The Safety Canopy娂 will
not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or
booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side window openings.
The Safety Canopy娂 system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy娂 inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
136

USA (fus)
The Safety Canopy娂 is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above the first and second row seats. In certain lateral
collisions or rollover events, the Safety Canopy娂 system will be
activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy娂 is
designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover
events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy娂 system did not activate in a collision
does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The
Safety Canopy娂 is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover
likelihood.
Several Safety Canopy娂 system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
If the Safety Canopy娂

system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy娂 will not
function again. The Safety
Canopy娂 system (including the
A, B and C pillar trim) must be
inspected and serviced by a
qualified technician in
accordance with the vehicle
service manual. If the Safety
Canopy娂 is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
137

USA (fus)
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision
or rollover event.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
138

USA (fus)
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats

Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
139

USA (fus)
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with

lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
140

USA (fus)
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can

slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN

Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
141

USA (fus)
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
lb. (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for
children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide
upper torso restraint for children up to 80 lb. (36 kg) using an upper
torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
142

USA (fus)
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed

in the front seats.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder

belts
airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear

seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a

seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt

and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
143

USA (fus)
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the

automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
144

USA (fus)
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to

remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps

Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as shown below.
145

USA (fus)
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• 5 passenger vehicle
For the center seat, use either of
the two tether anchors/cargo
tie-downs in the scuff plate along
the back edge of the floor.
• 7 passenger vehicle
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as

shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the rear seat cushion.

2. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head
restraint posts.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected rear seating position.
When placing a child safety seat in the 2nd row center seating position
of the 5 passenger vehicle, the tether straps may be attached to either of
the tether anchors located at the rear of the cargo area.
146

USA (fus)
• Behind 2nd row seat
• At the rear of the cargo area
147

USA (fus)
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat

may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.
5. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching child safety seats
with tether straps in this chapter.
148

USA (fus)
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol:
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child
safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
The lower anchors for child seat

installation are located at the rear
section of the second row seat
between the cushion and seat back.
The LATCH anchors are below the
locator symbols on the seat back.
149

USA (fus)
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments. Two plastic LATCH guides can be
obtained at no charge from any Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. They
snap onto the LATCH lower anchors in the seat to help attach a child
seat with rigid attachments. The guides hold the seat trim away to
expose the anchor and make it easier to attach some child seats.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to move the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
150

USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.

to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear safety belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints
to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
151

USA (fus)
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow
you to select different drive modes
as necessary. Information on
transfer case operation and shifting
procedures can be found in the
Driving chapter. Information on
transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and
Specification chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD
vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better
than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles

SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
152

USA (fus)
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
153

USA (fus)
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
154

USA (fus)
Glossary of tire terminology
• Safety Compliance Certification Label: A label showing the OE
(Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and
the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
155

USA (fus)
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if equipped).
Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
Inspecting your tires

Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs.
Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so
inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
Inflating your tires
When checking the air pressure in your tires, make sure that you
carefully attach the air pressure gauge/air hose to the tire’s valve
stem directly on top of the valve stem. If you bend the valve stem, it
may become damaged and cause an air leak.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial
type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
156

USA (fus)
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and

may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure

even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
157

USA (fus)
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. Check the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door for the recommended spare tire pressure.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford
or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
The tire pressure monitoring sensors mounted in the wheels (originally
installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in after market
wheels.
158

USA (fus)
The installation of replacement tires with steel cord body plies in the tire
sidewall may cause malfunction of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), and is not recommended (cord material information is molded
on the tire sidewall). Additionally, if your vehicle was originally equipped
with run-flat tires, replacing them with tires that are not identical to
those originally fitted may cause malfunction of the TPMS, and is not
recommended. Run-flat tires should not be used to replace regular tires.
Always check your TPMS indicator immediately after replacing one or
more tires on your vehicle. If the TPMS indicator is on, your TPMS is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your
TPMS system, or some component of the TPMS system may be damaged.
Important: Ford recommends you replace your tires every 6 years
regardless of the condition of the tire tread wear. As tires age, the
rubber weakens, potentially increasing the risk of a tire failure during
use, causing loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
Important: Remember to replace the spare tire when you replace the
road tires on your vehicle. Even if it has never been used, the spare tire
should be replaced because tires degrade over time.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel air valves when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
CHANGING THE TIRES

If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), the system indicator light will illuminate when the spare
is in use. To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system, all
road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be
mounted on the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat serviced by a dealer or
a qualified technician in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor,
refer to Changing tires with TPMS in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
159

USA (fus)
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires. The use of tire
sealants may also damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(if equipped).
If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (if
equipped) later in this chapter for important information. If the tire
pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information (if equipped)

Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A

dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
160

USA (fus)
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution
should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek
service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. If you get a flat tire while driving,
do not apply the brake heavily;
instead, gradually decrease your
speed. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
2. Park on a level surface, activate
the hazard flashers and set the
parking brake.
3. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)
and turn engine OFF.
When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park).
Note: Passengers should not remain

in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
4. Block the wheel that is diagonally
opposite of the flat tire using the
wheel chock provided with your
vehicle.
161

USA (fus)
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Tool Location
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just in front of
the rear bumper. The spare tire
winch drive nut is located at the
rear center of the cargo area
under a lid.
Jack, lug nut wrench, jack handle, Behind the rear seat under the
wheel chock carpeted floor lid in the cargo
floor. The tools are located in a
bag attached to the jack.
Removing the jack and tools
1. Open liftgate and remove the
carpeted floor lid, then the jack.
2. Turn jack screw eyelet
counterclockwise and remove the
jack from the bracket.
3. Remove the tools from the

provided bag.
162

USA (fus)
Rotate the wrench socket out from
the handle.
Removing the spare tire

Do not use an impact wrench on the winch drive nut. This will
damage the spare tire winch.
1. Open the cover from the carpeting on cargo floor to expose the winch
drive nut.
2. Insert the lug wrench on the
winch drive nut.
The wrench will stop moving and
forward resistance to turning will be
felt when properly engaged.
163

USA (fus)
3. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise until the tire is
lowered to the ground and the cable
has slack. When turning the wrench,
make sure that it does not scuff the
kick plate.
4. Slide the tire rearward, lift one
side and remove the retainer from
the spare tire.
Changing the spare tire

To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be
sure the parking brake is set, then block the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other end of the vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close

to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
1. Use the tip of the lug wrench to

remove the beauty cap by twisting
the tip under the cap. The carpeted
floor lid can be used as a kneeling
pad.
2. Loosen each wheel lug nut by half
a turn, but do not remove them
until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
164

USA (fus)
3. Assemble the jack handle
extension on the lug nut wrench by
sliding the square end of the jack
handle through the plastic grommet
on the lug nut wrench and into the
square hole on the other side.
4. Position the jack according to the

illustrated guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the tire is a
maximum of 1 inch (25 mm) off the
ground.
165

USA (fus)
To lessen the risk of

personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
• Never use the front or rear

differential as a jacking point.
5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts, cone side in, until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten 1
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque 3 4
specification.
5 2
Stowing the flat/spare tire

Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up, toward the
vehicle.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
166

USA (fus)
3. Turn the lug wrench clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your dealer for
assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire lock and key, be sure to
install the spare tire lock into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire
lock key and jack handle.
6. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance information),
or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
Re-stowing the jack and tools
1. Unblock the wheels.
2. Stow the wheel ornament (if removed) in a safe location in the vehicle
(such as the glove box or jack stowage compartment) so it will not
become damaged. Re-install the wheel ornament onto the wheel once the
tire is repaired or replaced.
3. Stow the jack and tools in their respective locations, making sure they
are fully secured so they do not rattle when you drive.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 50–100 miles (80–160
km) after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket size/Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. N•m
Lug nut socket size: 3⁄4” (19 mm) hex 100 135
Bolt size: 1⁄2 x 20
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
167

USA (fus)
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt and

foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
and the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of
control.
Note: If there is corrosion on the area where the wheel contacts the
hub, apply a thin film of grease or anti-seize compound on that area.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
168

USA (fus)
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
169

USA (fus)
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
170

USA (fus)
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type

tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
171

USA (fus)
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Safety Compliance Certification Label
You will find a Safety Compliance Certification Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Refer to the payload
description and graphic in the Vehicle loading — with and without a
trailer section.
172

USA (fus)
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:
Tire wear
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or
“wear bars”, which look like narrow
strips of smooth rubber across the
tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of
an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread
wears down to the same height as
these “wear bars”, the tire is worn
out and should be replaced.
Inspect your tires frequently for any
of the following conditions and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
• Fabric showing through the tire
rubber
• Bulges in the tread or sidewalls
• Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls
• Cracks in the tread groove
• Impact damage resulting from use
• Separation in the tread
• Separation in the sidewall
• Severe abrasion on the sidewall
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be
replaced.
173

USA (fus)
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may
require alignment of all four wheels.
174

USA (fus)
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
175

USA (fus)
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership to check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
176

USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)(IF EQUIPPED)
When the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System warning light is lit, one or
more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire
information placard (label). Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can eventually lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Even if your vehicle is
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is still important
that you manually check the inflation pressure of your tires regularly.
Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and
set to the recommended inflation pressure which can be found on either
the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver’s door.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inspecting and inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to
properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS

It is recommended that you always
have your tires serviced by a dealer
or qualified technician. Each road
tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted on the
wheel inside the tire connected
to the valve stem. The tire
pressure sensor must be
unbolted from the wheel prior to
tire removal. The sensor can be
removed by loosening the nut at the valve stem. Failure to
remove the sensor may damage it. The rubber grommet (washer)
between the wheel and the tire pressure sensor needs to be replaced
whenever the sensor is removed to minimize air leaks.
177

USA (fus)
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inspecting and inflating your tires in
this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle every
minute while you are driving and once an hour when your vehicle is
parked. The Low Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
25% below the pressure listed on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (approximately 6 to 9 psi below the manufacturer’s recommend
tire pressure). If the tire pressure increases 2 psi above the “Light ON”
threshold, then the TPMS light will turn OFF. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns ON
and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still needs to be
checked.
In short, once the light has turned ON, at least one tire may be under
inflated.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle. During this time, the low tire warning light can periodically
return or stay on, depending on the state of the damaged road
wheel/tire. This will include the message center messages (if equipped).
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
178

USA (fus)
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
Low Tire Warning Customer Action Required
Light
Solid Warning Light 1. Check your tire pressure to ensure they are
properly inflated, refer to Inspecting and
inflating your tires in this chapter. Ford
recommends the use of a digital or dial type
tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type
tire pressure gauge for increased accuracy.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended air pressure as
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (located on the driver’s door or the
B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for at
least two minutes at 20 mph (32 km/h) to
guarantee that the light will turn off.
3. If the light remains on even after these
steps have been taken, have the system
inspected by your servicing dealership
Flashing Warning Light 1. Your spare tire is in use. Repair the
(flashes for 20 to 30 damaged road wheel and re-mount it on the
seconds either at vehicle to restore system functionality. For a
start-up or while description of how the system functions under
driving) these conditions, refer to When You Have a
Flat Tire in this section.
2. If your tires are inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure,
and your spare tire is not in use, and a
flashing low time warning light is still present,
have the system inspected by your servicing
dealership.
179

USA (fus)
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires. Here are the details:
• The tire pressure monitor sensors mounted in your wheels updates
your vehicle with tire pressure information only once every minute,
therefore it may take up to a minute for the light to turn off after you
have filled your tires to the recommended tire pressure.
• If your vehicle has been parked for over 15 minutes, the sensors go
into a low power mode to conserve battery life and therefore only
transmit about once an hour. If you inflate your tires under these
conditions, the light could take up to an hour to turn off after you
have filled your tires to the recommended tire pressure.
For these reasons, the low tire warning light is NOT a substitute for
using an accurate tire gauge when checking and filling your tires. The
best way to turn off the low tire warning light is to fill your tires to the
recommended tire pressure and drive your vehicle — the tire pressure
sensors in your wheels will update your vehicle with the updated tire
pressure when your vehicle reaches a speed of 20 mph (32 km/h) for at
least a minute.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. The pressure in each tire is dependent upon several
factors, one of them being the contained air temperature (temperature of
the air inside the tire). As the contained air temperature increases, the
tire pressure also increases. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. This increase in tire pressure
is due to an increase in the contained air temperature. Contained air
temperature is dependent upon several factors such as rate of tire
rotation, tire deflection, amount of braking, etc. In similar manner, the
tire pressure will decrease if the contained air temperature decreases.
For example, if the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi (20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30°
F (16.6° C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be
detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the cold pressure
indicated on your vehicles Safety Compliance Certification Label, and
activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure. If the low warning light
is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
180

USA (fus)
tires are flat, repair as necessary. If all tires appear to be inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added
to the tires. Turn the ignition to the “off” position. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended cold pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inspecting and inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to
properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
USING SNOW TIRES AND TRACTION DEVICES

Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in

rain and snow. However, in some climates, using snow tires or traction
devices may be necessary. Ford offers tire cables as a Ford approved
accessory and recommends use of these or SAE class “S” tire cables. See
your dealer or qualified service technician for more information on tire
cables for your vehicle.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices:
• Cables or chains should only be used on the rear wheels.
• Install cables or chains securely, verifying that the cables or chains do
not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang against
the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the
cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage.
• Avoid overloading your vehicle.
• Remove the cables or chains when they are no longer needed.
• Do not use cables or chains on dry roads.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables or chains on your
vehicle.
181

USA (fus)
Consult your dealer for information on other Ford approved methods of
traction control.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
182

USA (fus)
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the

vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR
XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle
as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or dealer installed
equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the
equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
183

USA (fus)
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
184

USA (fus)
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label axle weight
rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in

this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
dealership.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +

passengers.
185

USA (fus)
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle

weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle

(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
186

USA (fus)
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your dealership (or
the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for
more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities

than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in

serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
187

USA (fus)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –
(5 x 220) – (5 x 30) = 1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (5
x 99 kg) — (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 — 495 — 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x
100) = 1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (12 x 45 kg) = 635 —
198 — 540 = —103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at
least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would be:
1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. .
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (9
x 45 kg) = 635 — 198 — 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
188

USA (fus)
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.

Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow
1. Use the appropriate maximum GCWR chart (in the Trailer towing
section in this chapter) for your type of engine and rear axle ratio.
2. Weigh your vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, take your
vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks.
3. Subtract your loaded weight from the maximum GCWR in the chart.
This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow. It must be
below the maximum trailer weight shown in the chart.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, transmission,
axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to maximize vehicle
performance, be sure to use the proper equipment while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500
miles (800 km).
189

USA (fus)
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter when figuring the total weight of your
vehicle.
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
4x2
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum Trailer weight
GCWR-lb. (kg) range-lb. (kg)
(0-Maximum)
4.0L SOHC 3.55 7700 (3493) 0–3140 (0–1424)
towing
4.6L* Class II 3.55 7700 (3493 0–3160 (0–1433)
towing
4.0L SOHC Class 3.73 LS 10240 (4645) 0–5660 (0–2567)
III/IV Towing
4.6L* Class III/IV 3.73/3.73 LS 11600 (5262) 0–7040 (0–3193)
Towing
Notes: - For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300
meters) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table and
instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle loading
in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined weight of
the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the
GCWR.
*-When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and on
steep grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine
from overheating. This may result in a temporary increase of interior
temperatures.
Towing a trailer over 3,500 lb. (1,588 kg.) requires a weight distributing
hitch.
190

USA (fus)
4x4/AWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum Trailer weight
GCWR-lb. (kg) range-lb. (kg)
(0-Maximum)
4.0L SOHC Class 3.55 8000 (3629) 0–3300 (0–1497)
II towing
4.6L* Class II 3.55 8000 (3629) 0–3320 (0–1506)
towing
4.0L SOHC Class 3.73 LS 10000 (4536) 0–5280 (0–2395)
III/IV Towing
4.6L* Class III/IV 3.73/3.73 LS 11600 (5262) 0–6900 (0–3130
Towing )
Notes: - For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.
(300 meters) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table and
instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle
loading in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined
weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not
exceed the GCWR.
*-When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and
on steep grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the
engine from overheating. This may result in a temporary increase of
interior temperatures.
Towing a trailer over 3,500 lb. (1,588 kg) requires a weight distributing
hitch.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue, not to exceed
the maximum tongue loads as stated:
• Class II receiver: 350 lb. (159 kg)
191

USA (fus)
• Class III/IV receiver: 500 lb. (227 kg) (weight carrying); 770 lb. (349
kg) (weight distributing)
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking up trailer lamps.
Never connect any trailer lighting to the vehicle’s taillamp
circuits, because it may damage the electrical system resulting in
fire. Contact your local Ford dealership for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Driving while you tow

When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
192

USA (fus)
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission section in the
Driving chapter.)
• Under extreme conditions with large frontal trailers, high outside
temperatures and highway speeds, the coolant gauge may indicate
higher than normal coolant temperatures. If this occurs, reduce speed
until the coolant temperature returns to the normal range. Refer to
Engine coolant temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance
Information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
193

USA (fus)
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (such as behind a
recreational vehicle).
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) 4x2 vehicles:
This applies to all 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel drive
capability.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your
local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
AWD vehicles:
Vehicles equipped with AWD cannot be towed with any wheels on the
ground as vehicle damage may occur.
194

USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition

1. OFF/LOCK, shuts off the engine
and all accessories/locks the steering
wheel, gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
2. ACC, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running. This position also unlocks
the steering wheel.
3. ON, all electrical circuits
operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Important safety precautions

When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
195

USA (fus)
Driving
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
• Turn the key to 3 (ON) without

turning the key to 4 (START).
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a

light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate.
196

USA (fus)
Driving
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START). If
there is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely. This condition may
occur when:
• the front wheels are turned
• a front wheel is against the curb
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, you may
experience increased cranking times, rough idle or hesitation until the
engine has warmed up. Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of
winter grade ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to OFF and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will
improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate
on E85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information on ethanol.
197

USA (fus)
Driving
If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions (flexible
fuel vehicles only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to start,
repeat Step 1.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night
before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes

Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information

If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.
198

USA (fus)
Driving
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster ! P
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light. BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If ABS
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If ! P
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.)
Brake Assist (if equipped as part of the AdvanceTrac姞 system)

The Brake Assist system provides full braking force during panic braking
situations. It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and
maximizes the amount of brake booster assist, helping the driver to
achieve maximum braking pressure. Once a panic brake application is
detected, the system will remain activated as long as the brake pedal is
depressed. The system is deactivated by releasing the brake pedal.
When the system activates, the brake pedal will travel with very little
effort; this is normal.
199

USA (fus)
Driving
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the

instrument cluster illuminates and ! P
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the BRAKE
parking brake is released.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.

However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
200

USA (fus)
Driving
Pull the release lever to release the
brake. Driving with the parking
brake on will cause the brakes to
wear out quickly and reduce fuel
economy.
ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL (RSC)

STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The AdvanceTrac威 system provides a stability enhancement feature as
well as a traction enhancement feature. It helps your vehicle maintain
traction, when driving on slippery and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting
and controlling wheel spin. Excessive wheel spin is controlled by
momentarily reducing engine power and rapidly applying the anti-lock
brakes. The system is a driver aid which makes your vehicle easier to
handle primarily on snow and ice-covered roads.
If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching
the AdvanceTrac威 system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac威 button. This
will allow your tires to “dig” for traction.
If the AdvanceTrac威 system is activated excessively in a short period of
time, the brake portion of the system will shut down to allow the brakes
to cool down. A limited AdvanceTrac威 function using only engine power
reduction will still help control the wheels from over-spinning. When the
brakes have cooled down, the system will again function normally.
Anti-lock braking is not affected by this condition and will function
normally during the cool-down period.
AdvanceTrac威 enhances your vehicle’s stability during maneuvers that
require all available tire traction, like in wet/snowy/icy road conditions
and/or when performing emergency maneuvers. In an emergency
lane-change, the driver will experience better overall vehicle traction,
and have better control of the vehicle.
The AdvanceTrac威 system helps the driver maintain steering control if
the vehicle begins to slide excessively left or right or spin out.
AdvanceTrac威 will attempt to correct the sliding motion by applying
brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by reducing engine
power.
201

USA (fus)
Driving
Driving conditions which may activate AdvanceTrac威 include:
• Taking a turn too fast.
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle.
• Hitting a patch of ice.
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road.
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa.
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa.
• Driving on slick surfaces.
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.)
Roll Stability Control System (if equipped)
The Roll Stability Control system works in conjunction with the
AdvanceTrac威 system to further enhance the vehicle’s overall stability
during aggressive maneuvers. The system helps maintain roll stability of
the vehicle during aggressive maneuvers by applying brake force to one
or more wheels.
Driving conditions that may activate Roll Stability Control include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
The AdvanceTrac威/Roll Stability Control system automatically turns on
when the engine is started. However, the system does not function when
the vehicle is traveling in R (Reverse). In R (Reverse), ABS and the
traction enhancement feature will continue to function.
The AdvanceTrac威/Roll Stability
Control button allows the driver to
control the availability of the
AdvanceTrac威/Roll Stability Control
system. AdvanceTrac威/Roll Stability
Control system status is indicated by a warning indicator light with a
“sliding car” icon in the instrument cluster that will flash when the
system is active and an indicator light in the control button that will
illuminate when the system is turned off. In vehicles with a message
center, the message “ADVANCETRAC OFF” will be displayed.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac威/Roll Stability Control system,
the warning indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. If the
202

USA (fus)
Driving
warning indicator light in the instrument cluster remains on while the
engine is running, have the system serviced immediately.
Pressing the control once will disable the AdvanceTrac威 stability
enhancement/Roll Stability Control and the engine power reduction
portion of the traction enhancement feature; the brake portion of the
traction enhancement feature will still function normally. Pressing and
holding the control for more than five seconds will disable the
AdvanceTrac威 stability enhancement/Roll Stability Control and traction
enhancement feature. If the vehicle is stuck in snow or mud or when
driving in deep sand, switching off the AdvanceTrac威 system may be
beneficial so the wheels are allowed to spin. If your vehicle seems to lose
engine power while driving in deep sand or very deep snow, switching off
the AdvanceTrac威 stability enhancement feature will restore full engine
power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle.
Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the
AdvanceTrac威 performs a system self-check. During AdvanceTrac威/Roll
Stability Control operation you may experience the following:
• A rumble or grinding noise
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The AdvanceTrac威 indicator light will flash
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the
pedal.
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal will move to apply higher brake forces. You may also hear
a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe
condition.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac威/Roll Stability
Control operation.
Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s suspension or steering; the
resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can adversely affect
the AdvanceTrac威/Roll Stability Control system.
Note: Pressing the AdvanceTrac威 button will disable AdvanceTrac威 and
Roll Stability Control.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a AdvanceTrac威/Roll
Stability Control event is an indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
203

USA (fus)
Driving
STEERING
To prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump reservoir
fluid level (below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
other types of vehicles.

to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
204

USA (fus)
Driving
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle

differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the
key.
2. Locate the access plug to the
brake-shift interlock override. It is
located on the underside of the
steering column.
205

USA (fus)
Driving
3. Remove the access plug with a
flat head screwdriver (or similar
tool).
4. Insert a tool (or screwdriver) into the access hole to override the
brake-shift interlock. Apply the brake and shift into Neutral.
5. Return the cover plug to the access hole. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
206

USA (fus)
Driving
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.

Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
207

USA (fus)
Driving
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through five.
D (Drive) without Overdrive
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the end of the gearshift
lever.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.

• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
O/D
OFF
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
3 (Third)
Transmission operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
208

USA (fus)
Driving
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R

(Reverse) and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or

moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
209

USA (fus)
Driving
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or

surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
The RSS detects obstacles up to six

feet (two meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
The RSS automatically turns on

when the gear selector is placed in OFF
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
An RSS control on the instrument
panel allows the driver to turn the
RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off,
the ignition must be ON, and the
gear selector in R (Reverse). An
indicator light on the control will
illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator light illuminates
when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a failure in the RSS.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
210

USA (fus)
Driving
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
LIMITED-SLIP AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
limited slip axle functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
limited slip rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving
and should not be noticeable to the driver.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
transfer case. With the AWD option, power is supplied to all four wheels
all the time with no need to shift between two-wheel drive and
four-wheel drive.
For the lubricant specification and refill capacity of the AWD transfer
case refer to Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different
size than the road tires should never be used. Such a tire could
make the vehicle difficult to control as well as result in damage to
driveline components.
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for

cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these
vehicles.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles

AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
211

USA (fus)
Driving
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
injury and death.
212

USA (fus)
Driving
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
213

USA (fus)
Driving

injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AWD Systems (if equipped)
AWD uses all four wheels to power
the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain
and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), the system indicator light may illuminate depending on
how much air is released from your tires and/or how long you drive the
vehicle under these conditions.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
214

USA (fus)
Driving
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
215

USA (fus)
Driving
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, Do not try to
turnaround because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
216

USA (fus)
Driving
Driving on snow and ice
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use
a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing
force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you
may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels,
release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle
is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS), apply the
brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of
this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock
brake system.
Never drive with chains on the front tires of AWD vehicles without also
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and
swing around during braking.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
217

USA (fus)
Driving
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the
bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may
stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent
tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and
cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
218

USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery (2.0 gallons [7.5L], maximum two occurrences within 12
month period)
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents, are covered (some
exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
219

USA (fus)
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY

In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH RESET
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been activated.
220

USA (fus)
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the passenger’s foot well,
by the kick panel.
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by
pushing in on the reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and
return the key to the OFF position.
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate 15
fuses before replacing any electrical

components.
221

USA (fus)
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse Standard Cartridge
Mini fuses Maxi fuses
rating fuses maxi fuses
2A Grey Grey — —
3A Violet Violet — —
4A Pink Pink — —
5A Tan Tan — —
7.5A Brown Brown — —
10A Red Red — —
15A Blue Blue — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue
25A Natural Natural — —
30A Green Green Green Pink
40A — — Orange Green
50A — — Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow
70A — — Tan —
80A — — Natural —
222

USA (fus)
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located below the
instrument panel on the driver’s
side.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel box.
6 16 21 26
7 17 22 27
8 18 23 28
9 19 24 29
10 20 25 30
11
1
12
2
13
3
14
4 15
5
223

USA (fus)
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse
Location Rating Panel Description
1 30A Memory seat module, Driver
power seat, Driver power lumbar
2 20A Moonroof
3 20A Radio, Amplifier, DVD
4 5A Front wiper module
5 15A Flasher relay (Turn, hazards)
6 10A Key-in-chime
7 15A Heated mirrors
8 5A Heated PCV (4.0L engine only)
9 15A Not used
10 10A Heated backlight relay coil, A/C
clutch contact
11 20A Heated seats
12 5A Not used
13 5A Overdrive cancel switch
14 5A PATS
15 5A Rear wiper module, Cluster
16 5A Power mirror, Manual climate
control, TPMS
17 15A Delayed accessory relay
coil/Battery saver coil and
contact/Reading and glove box
lamps
18 10A Flexible fuel pump
19 10A Restraint Control Module (RCM)
20 5A Memory driver seat switch, Driver
seat module, Body Security
Module (BSM), PATS LED
21 5A Instrument cluster, Compass,
Flasher coil
22 10A ABS, IVD Controller
224

USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse

Location Rating Panel Description
23 15A Not used
24 15A Cigar lighter, OBD II
25 5A Mode-Temperature actuator for
auxiliary climate control, Trailer
tow battery charge relay coil,
TPMS
26 7.5A Reverse park aid, Brake shift
interlock, IVD switch
27 7.5A Automatic dimming mirror, Digital
transmission range sensor, Backup
lamps
28 5A Radio (Start)
29 10A Digital transmission range sensor,
PWR feed to fuse #28 (Start feed)
30 5A Daytime Running Lamps (DRL),
DEATC climate controller, Manual
climate control, Manual climate
control temp blend actuator
225

USA (fus)
Passenger compartment fuse panel (top side)
These relays are located on the reverse side of the passenger

compartment fuse panel. See your dealer or a certified technician for
service of this relay box.
Fuse/Relay Location Description
Relay 1 Flasher
Relay 2 Rear defrost
Relay 3 Delayed accessory
Relay 4 Open
Relay 5 Battery saver
Relay 6 Open
Relay 7 Open
226

USA (fus)
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is
located in the engine compartment.
The power distribution box contains
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current

fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to

the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the

Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
227

USA (fus)
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box
Location Rating Description
1 60A** PJB #1
2 30A** BSM
3 — Not used
4 30A** Rear defrost
5 40A** Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
pump
6 60A** Delayed accessory, Power
windows, Audio
7 20A** Power point #2
8 — Not used
9 20A** Power point #1
10 30A** ABS module (valves)
11 40A** Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
12 50A** Ignition relay, Starter relay
13 40A** Trailer tow battery charge, Trailer
tow turn signals
14 — Not used
15 15A* Memory (PCM/DEATC/Cluster),
Courtesy lamps
228

USA (fus)

16 15A* Park lamps, Autolamp parklamps,
Front foglamps relay coil
17 — Not used
18 20A* PCM with two-speed 4x4 clutch
19 20A** High beam relay
20 30A** Trailer electric brake module
21 30A** Front wiper motor
22 20A** Low beam, Autolamp
23 30A** Ignition switch, PCM diode
24 — Not used
25 15A* Brake on-off
26 20A* Fuel pump
27 20A* Trailer tow park lamps, Trailer
tow back-up
28 20A* Horn relay
29 60A** PJB #2
30 20A** Rear wiper motor
31 — Not used
32 — Not used
33 30A** Auxiliary blower motor
34 30A** Passenger power seat, Adjustable
pedals (non-memory)
35 — Not used
36 40A** Blower motor
37 15A* A/C clutch relay, Transmission
38 15A* HEGO, VMV, CMS, ESM, CVS
39 15A* Injectors, Fuel pump relay coil
40 15A* PCM power
41 15A* Coil on plug (4.6L engine only),
Ignition coil (4.0L engine only)
42 10A* Right low beam
43 10A* Left low beam
229

USA (fus)

44 15A* Front foglamps
45 2A* Brake pressure switch
(non-AdvanceTrac威 vehicles)
46 20A* High beams
47 — Horn relay
48 — Fuel pump relay
49 — High beam relay
50 — Front fog lamps relay
51 — Not used
52 — A/C clutch relay
53 — Trailer tow right turn relay
54 — Trailer tow left turn relay
55 — Blower motor relay
56 — Starter relay
57 — PCM relay
58 — Ignition relay
59 — Not used
60 — PCM diode
61 — A/C clutch diode
62 30A CB Power windows circuit breaker
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
Rear relay box

The relay box is located on the rear passenger side quarter trim panel.
See your dealer or a certified technician for service of this relay box.
230

USA (fus)
The relays are coded as follows:

Fuse/Relay Location Description
Relay 14 Not used
Relay 15 Trailer tow back-up lamps
Relay 16 Not used
Relay 17 Not used
Relay 18 Not used
Relay 19 Trailer tow park lamps
Relay 20 Trailer tow battery charge
Relay 21 Not used
Relay 22 Not used
Relay 23 Not used
Diode 3 Not used
Diode 4 Not used
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
231

USA (fus)
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
Preparing your vehicle

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
–
+
–
+
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
232

USA (fus)
+
–
+
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
–
+
–
+
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
233

USA (fus)
+
–
+
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
234

USA (fus)
+
–
+
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
–
+
–
+
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
235

USA (fus)
+
–
+
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
236

USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing

service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to Automatic transmission
operation in the Driving chapter for directions on how to move the
gearshift lever out of the P (Park) position, for proper towing.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
On AWD vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
237

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized Lincoln
Mercury dealer for warranty repairs. While any Ford or Lincoln Mercury
dealership handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require
special training and/or equipment, so not all dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after
taking your vehicle to the dealership. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Lincoln Mercury Customer
Relationship Center at 1-800-521-4140.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
238

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
239

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
240

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
241

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
242

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call the Board
at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 1424
Waukesha, WI 53187–1424
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an
impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
243

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of
Canada dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
244

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
245

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
246

USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is
available from your dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
WAXING
Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your dealer, or an
equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
247

USA (fus)
Cleaning
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS

Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high
pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
248

USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
4.0L SOHC V6 Engine
4.6L V8 Engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
249

USA (fus)
Cleaning
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other
organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth, or use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in

contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
250

USA (fus)
Cleaning
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
251

USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
252

USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
• Use the scheduled maintenance information to track routine
service.
• Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications.
• Your dealership can provide parts and service.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do
not remove it while the engine is running.
253

USA (fus)
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
254

USA (fus)
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.0L SOHC V6 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Power steering fluid reservoir
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Power distribution box
6. Battery
7. Engine oil dipstick
8. Air filter assembly
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
255

USA (fus)
4.6L V8 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Power distribution box
5. Battery
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Engine oil filler cap
8. Air filter assembly
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
256

USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.

Refer to Lubricant specifications later in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer

fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling
system components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
257

USA (fus)
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil

Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
• 4.0L V6 engine
258

USA (fus)
• 4.6L V8 engine
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable, DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level
within the MIN-MAX range .
• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine
259

USA (fus)
• 4.6L V8 engine
• Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil

1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn or until three clicks can be heard.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
260

USA (fus)
Engine Oil Recommendations
4.6L Engine
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A. SAE
5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
the scheduled maintenance information.
261

USA (fus)
4.0L Engine
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil.

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 or an
equivalent 5W-30 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C929-A.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
262

USA (fus)
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the

battery electrolyte level. Refer to scheduled maintenance information
for the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
263

USA (fus)
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the

end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric

acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,

some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
264

USA (fus)
• Always dispose of automotive
RE
AD
batteries in a responsible manner.
TU
Follow your local authorized
LE
R
standards for disposal. Call your
N
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant

The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The
coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled
water, which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant
concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester
(such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The
level of coolant should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls
below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant
section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
265

USA (fus)
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
266

USA (fus)
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid

container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant

(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA, OR and NM),
VC-7–B (CA, OR and NM), meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M97B51–A1.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
267

USA (fus)
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles, which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed (until “clicks” are heard).
(Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer
to Checking engine coolant section. If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
268

USA (fus)
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate

manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
269

USA (fus)
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (4.6L V8 engine
only)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• HIGH TEMP LOW OIL (if equipped) or CHECK GAUGE (if equipped)
will illuminate.
• The Service engine soon indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
270

USA (fus)
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.

Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or

mishandled.
271

USA (fus)
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
272

USA (fus)
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an

ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Choosing the right fuel
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED
FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75–Ed85)
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
273

USA (fus)
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Do not be concerned if your engine
87
sometimes knocks lightly. However,
if it knocks heavily under most
driving conditions while you are (R+M)/2 METHOD
using fuel with the recommended
octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent
any engine damage.
Unleaded Gasoline engines
Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with an
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of gasolines
labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in
high altitude areas.
FFV engine (if equipped)
Your vehicle is designed to use Fuel Ethanol (Ed75–Ed85), “Regular”
unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels.
U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to have a small, square, orange and black label with the
common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that
region. Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your
warranty may be invalidated.
Fuel quality
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
274

USA (fus)
Unleaded Gasoline engines
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded
gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly
in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become
more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
FFV engine (if equipped)
Your FFV will operate well on ordinary “Regular” unleaded gasoline, but
only the highest quality fuel ethanol will provide the same level of
protection and performance. To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, check
your VIN or the label on the inside of your fuel filler door. When
checking the VIN, look for the engine type identifier (8th character). If
your vehicle is an FFV, then the character will be labeled as a “K.”
If you operate your vehicle 50% or more of the time on ethanol, you
should follow a different maintenance schedule. See the Scheduled
Maintenance Guide for more information.
If you are experiencing a rough or rolling idle after start-up with the
outside temperature above 80° F (27° C), the idle should improve within
10 to 30 seconds. If the problems persist below this temperature, see
your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
275

USA (fus)
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
If the “Check Fuel Cap” indicator comes on and stays on after you start
the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the
engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the
appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
276

USA (fus)
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
277

USA (fus)
Filling the tank for FFV equipped vehicles
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results it is
recommended that you do not add less than five gallons of fuel when
refueling. Observing this precaution will avoid possible hard starting
and/or deterioration in drivability during warm up.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
278

USA (fus)
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
279

USA (fus)
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
Flex fuel (E-85) cruising range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline, you will
experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your Miles
Per Gallon (MPG) and your driving range to decrease by about 30%
compared to gasoline operation.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
280

USA (fus)
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the “Check Engine” light, charging system warning light

or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or
loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is
not working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By

law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check
engine/Service engine soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check
engine/Service engine soon light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run
poorly.)
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
281

USA (fus)
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the Check engine/Service engine soon light should turn off. (A
driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Check engine/Service engine soon light remains on, have your
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check engine/Service engine
soon light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the Check engine/Service engine soon light on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
POWER STEERING FLUID

Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use
only MERCON威 ATF.
282

USA (fus)
• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine
• 4.6L V8 engine
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
5. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the correct operating range. Be sure to put the
cap back on the reservoir.
283

USA (fus)
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels below the “MAX” line
that do not trigger the brake system
warning lamp are within the normal
operating range, there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of your
brake system could be
compromised, seek service from your dealer immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Transmission fluid should be checked and, if required, fluid
should be added by a qualified technician.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
284

USA (fus)
CHANGING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be voided for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
285

USA (fus)
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant

specifications in this chapter.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for
maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with
universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be
necessary.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 4.0L SOHC V6 engine 4.6L 3V V8 engine
Air filter element FA-1695 FA-1695
Fuel filter 2C5E-9155-BB 2C5E-9155-BB
Battery BXT-65-650 BXT-65-650
Oil filter FL-820S FL-820S
1
PCV valve
2
Spark plugs
1
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
286

USA (fus)
2
For spark plug replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid Ford Part Application Capacity
Name
Brake fluid Motorcraft High All Fill to the MAX
Performance line on reservoir
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Engine oil Motorcraft SAE 4.0L 5.0 quarts
(including filter 5W-30 Premium (4.7L)
change)5 Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-30 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 4.6L 6.0 quarts
5W-20 Premium (5.7L)
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
Fuel tank N/A All 22.5 gallons
(85.2L)
287

USA (fus)

Name
Power steering Motorcraft All Fill between
fluid MERCON 威 ATF MIN and MAX
lines on
reservoir
Transmission Motorcraft All 12.7 quarts
fluid 1 MERCON威 V (12.0L) 2
ATF
Transfer case Motorcraft AWD 1.3 quarts
MERCON 威 ATF (1.25L)
3
Engine coolant Motorcraft 4.0L SOHC V6 16.3 quarts
Premium Gold engine without (15.4L)
Engine Coolant auxiliary climate
(yellow-colored) control
4.0L SOHC V6 18.2 quarts
engine with (17.2L)
auxiliary climate
control
4.6L V8 engine 18.6 quarts
without (17.6L)
auxiliary climate
control
4.6L V8 engine 20.1 quarts
with auxiliary (19.0L)
climate control
Front axle Motorcraft SAE 4x4/AWD 1.4 quarts
lubricant 80W-90 vehicles (1.3L)
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Rear axle Motorcraft SAE Conventional 3.5 pints (1.7L)
lubricant 75W-140 Axle
Synthetic Rear Limited Slip 3.25 pints (1.5L)
Axle Lubricant Axle4
288

USA (fus)

Name
Windshield Motorcraft All vehicles 4.2 quarts
washer fluid Premium (4.0L)
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
1
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCON威 and
MERCON威 V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON威 and
MERCON威 V. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval.
2
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be checked by a qualified
technician.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Limited Slip differentials must add 4 oz (118 ml ) of additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent to the rear axle whenever the axle has been
serviced.
5
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine
oil need only have the API Certification mark and meet the requirements
of Ford specification WSS-M2C929-A (4.0L) or WSS-M2C930-A (4.6L).
289

USA (fus)
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Ford Part Name Ford Part Ford
Item
or equivalent Number Specification
Body hinges,
latches, door
striker plates
and rotors, seat Multi-Purpose
ESR-M1C159-A
tracks, fuel filler Grease or
XG–4 or XL-5 or
door hinge and Multi-Purpose
ESB-M1C93–B
spring, hood Grease Spray
latch, auxiliary
latch, seat
tracks
Motorcraft High
ESA-M6C25-A
Hydraulic brake Performance DOT PM-1
or
fluid 3 Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid WSS-M6C62–A
Driveshaft, slip Premium Long
spline, universal Life Grease XG-1-C or XG-1-K ESA-M1C75-B
joints
Engine coolant Motorcraft VC-7-A (U.S., WSS-M97B51-A1
Premium Gold except CA, OR
Engine Coolant and NM), VC-7-B
(yellow-colored) (CA, OR and NM)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-30 Premium
Synthetic Blend XO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C929-A
Motor Oil (US) (US) with API
4.0L Engine oil
Motorcraft SAE CXO-5W30-LSP12 Certification
5W-30 Super (Canada) Mark
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE
5W20 Premium
Synthetic Blend XO -5W20-QSP WSS-M2C930-A
Motor Oil (US) (US) with API
4.6L Engine oil Motorcraft SAE CXO-5W20–LSP12 Certification
5W-20 Super (Canada) Mark
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
290

USA (fus)
Ford Part Name Ford Part Ford

Item
or equivalent Number Specification
Automatic Motorcraft
transmission 1 XT-5-QM MERCON威V
MERCON威V ATF
Motorcraft
Power steering MERCON 威
XT-2-QDX MERCON威
fluid Multi-Purpose
ATF
75W-140 High
Performance
Rear axles XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192–A
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant2
Motorcraft SAE
Front axle 80W-90 Premium
XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A
(AWD) Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft
Transfer case MERCON威
XT-2-QDX MERCON威
(AWD) Multi-Purpose
ATF
Transfer case
Premium
Front Output XG-1-C or XG-1-K ESA-M1C75-B
Long-Life Grease
Slip Shaft
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Windshield ZC–32–A WSB-M8B16–A2
washer fluid
Washer
Concentrate
1
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCON威 and
MERCON威 V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON威 and
MERCON威 V. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval.
2
Limited-slip differentials must add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL–3 or equivalent to the rear axle whenever the axle has been
serviced.
291

USA (fus)
ENGINE DATA
Engine 4.0L SOHC V6 engine 4.6L V8 engine
Cubic inches 245 281
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Ignition system EDIS EDIS
Spark plug gap 0.052–0.056 inch 0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42mm) (1.32–1.42mm)
Compression ratio 9.7:1 9.4:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Vehicle dimensions Inches (mm)
(1) Overall length 191.6 (4866.7)
(2) Overall width 72.3 (1836.7)
(2) Overall width including outside 83.9 (2130.8)
mirrors
(3) Maximum height 69.8 (1772.3)
(3) Maximum height* with 72.0 (1829.1)
crossbar
(4) Wheelbase 113.7 (2889)
(5) Track width, front 60.9 (1547)
(5) Track width, rear 61.3 (1556.5)
* P245/65R17 tire with roof rack
292

USA (fus)
4
1
293

USA (fus)
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure by the
trailing edge of the driver’s door or
Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is a 17 digit combination of
letters and numbers. The VIN is XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. The VIN number
is also found on the Certification
label. (Please note that in the
graphic XXXX is representative of
your vehicle identification number.)
1. World manufacturer identifier

2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
294

USA (fus)
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and
transfer case (if equipped).
Transmission/Transaxle code designations
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Label . The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Code Description
V Five-speed automatic (5R55S)
295

USA (fus)
Accessories
MERCURY ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Mercury Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Mercury or Ford of Canada dealer.
These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Mercury’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Mercury
Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for
whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Mercury Accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000
km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy
of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
Following is a list of several Genuine Mercury Accessory products. Not
all accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories
are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our
online store at: www.mercuryaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Headlamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)
Running boards
Splash guards
Wheels
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Scuff plates
296

USA (fus)
Accessories
Lifestyle
Bike racks
Cargo organization and management
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
First aid and highway safety kits
Full vehicle covers
Locking gas cap
Navigation systems
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Keyless entry keypad
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
297

USA (fus)
Index
A acid, treating emergencies .....263
jumping a disabled battery ....231
Accessory delay ..........................62 maintenance-free ....................263
AdvanceTrac ..............................201 replacement, specifications ...286
servicing ..................................263
Air cleaner filter ...............284–286
BeltMinder .................................126
Air conditioning ..........................39
Brakes ........................................198
Airbag supplemental anti-lock ...................................199
restraint system ........130–131, 135
and child safety seats ............132 anti-lock brake system
description ......................131, 135 (ABS) warning light ...............199
disposal ....................................138 fluid, checking and adding ....284
driver airbag ....................133, 136 fluid, refill capacities ..............287
indicator light .................135, 137 fluid, specifications .........290, 292
operation .........................133, 136 lubricant specifications ..290, 292
passenger airbag .............133, 136 parking ....................................200
All Wheel Drive (AWD), shift interlock ..........................205
driving off road .........................211
Ambulance packages ....................7 C
Antifreeze Calculating load ........................189
(see Engine coolant) ................265
Capacities for refilling fluids ....287
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................199 Cargo cover .................................89
Audio system Cell phone use ............................57
(see Radio) ................18, 21, 25, 30
Changing a tire .........................159
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic Child safety restraints ..............139
overdrive .................................207 child safety belts ....................139
fluid, adding ............................284 Child safety seats ......................141
fluid, checking ........................284 attaching with tether straps ..145
fluid, refill capacities ..............287 in front seat ............................143
fluid, specification ..................292 in rear seat ..............................143
Auxiliary power point .................60 Cleaning your vehicle
Axle engine compartment ..............248
lubricant instrument panel ....................250
specifications ..................290, 292 interior .....................................251
refill capacities ........................287 interior trim ............................251
plastic parts ............................250
B safety belts ..............................251
washing ....................................247
Battery .......................................263 waxing .....................................247
298
Index
wheels ......................................248 D
wiper blades ............................250
Daytime running lamps
Climate control (see Air (see Lamps) ................................44
conditioning or Heating) ............39
Defrost
Clock adjust rear window ..............................43
6-CD in dash .................23, 27, 32
Dipstick
AM/FM/CD .................................18 automatic transmission
Compass, electronic ..............73–74 fluid ..........................................284
calibration .................................75 engine oil .................................258
set zone adjustment ...........74, 77 Doors
Console ........................................57 lubricant specifications ..........290
overhead ..............................58–59 Driveline universal joint and
rear ............................................58 slip yoke ....................................286
Controls Driving under special
power seat ...............................107 conditions ..................209, 213, 216
steering column ........................66 sand .........................................214
snow and ice ...........................217
Coolant
through water .................215, 218
checking and adding ..............265
refill capacities ................269, 287 Dual automatic temperature
specifications ..................290, 292 control (DATC) ...........................39
Cruise control DVD system .................................35
(see Speed control) ....................64
E
Customer Assistance ................219
Ford accessories for your
Electronic message center .........75
vehicle .....................................252
Ford Extended Service Emergencies, roadside
Plan ..........................................244 jump-starting ..........................231
Getting assistance outside Emergency Flashers .................220
the U.S. and Canada ..............245
Getting roadside assistance ...219 Emission control system ..........280
Getting the service Engine ........................................292
you need .................................238 cleaning ...................................248
Ordering additional coolant .....................................265
owner’s literature ...................245 fail-safe cooling .......................270
The Dispute Settlement idle speed control ...................263
Board .......................................240 lubrication
Utilizing the Mediation/ specifications ..................290, 292
Arbitration Program ...............243 refill capacities ........................287
299
Index
service points ..................255–256 safety information relating
starting after a collision .........220 to automotive fuels ................271
Engine block heater .................198 Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .................................273–274
Engine oil ..................................258
checking and adding ..............258 Fuses ..................................221, 223
dipstick ....................................258 G
filter, specifications ........261, 286
recommendations ...................261 Garage door opener ....................59
refill capacities ........................287 Garage Door Opener
specifications ..................290, 292 (see Homelink wireless
Exhaust fumes ..........................198 control system) ...........................69
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............276
F Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................277
Fail safe cooling ........................270 Gauges .........................................14
Floor mats ...................................88 GAWR (Gross Axle
Fluid capacities .........................287 Weight Rating)
Foglamps .....................................44 calculating ...............................189
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles GVWR (Gross Vehicle
driving off road .......................211 Weight Rating)
preparing to drive your calculating ...............................189
vehicle .....................................204
H
Fuel ............................................271
calculating fuel Hazard flashers .........................220
economy ............................78, 277
cap ...........................................276 Head restraints .........................105
capacity ...................................287 Headlamps
choosing the right fuel ...........273 aiming ........................................46
comparisons with EPA fuel bulb specifications ....................48
economy estimates .................280 daytime running lights .............44
detergent in fuel .....................275 flash to pass ..............................45
filling your vehicle high beam .................................45
with fuel ..................271, 276–277 Heating
filter, specifications ........276, 286 heating and air conditioning
fuel pump shut-off switch .....220 system .................................37, 39
improving fuel economy ........277
octane rating ...................274, 292 Homelink wireless control
quality ......................................274 system ..........................................69
running out of fuel .................275 Hood ..........................................254
300
Index
I Loading instructions .................189
Ignition ...............................195, 292 Locks

autolock ...................................100
Infant seats childproof ..................................93
(see Safety seats) .....................141
doors ..........................................92
Inspection/maintenance
(I/M) testing ..............................282 Lubricant specifications ...290, 292
Instrument panel Lug nuts ....................................167
cleaning ...................................250
cluster ........................................10 Luggage rack ...............................90
Lumbar support,
J seats ...........................107, 109–110
Jack ....................................159, 162
positioning .......................159, 164 M
storage .............................159, 162
Manual transmission
Jump-starting your vehicle ......231 lubricant specifications ..........292
K Message center .....................75–76
english/metric button ...............81
Keyless entry system .................98 system check button ................80
autolock ...................................100 warning messages .....................82
Keys Mirrors ...................................60, 63
positions of the ignition .........195 automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................63
L fold away ...................................63
heated ........................................62
Lamps side view mirrors (power) .......62
bulb replacement Moon roof ....................................68
specifications chart ..................48
daytime running light ...............44 Motorcraft parts ................276, 286
fog lamps ...................................44
instrument panel, dimming .....45 O
interior lamps ...........................47
replacing bulbs .........................52 Octane rating ............................274
Liftgate ..................................88, 95 Oil (see Engine oil) ..................258
Lights, warning and indicator ....10 P
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........199
Limited-slip axle .......................211 Parking brake ............................200
Load limits .................................182 Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....286
301
Index
Pedals (see Power belt minder .............................126
adjustable foot pedals) ...............63 extension assembly ................125
Power adjustable foot pedals .....63 for adults .........................120–123
for children .....................138–139
Power distribution box safety belt maintenance .........130
(see Fuses) ...............................227 warning light and
Power door locks ........................92 chime ...............................125–126
Power mirrors .............................62 Safety seats for children ..........141
Power point ...........................60–61 Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................294
Power steering ..........................204
fluid, checking and adding ....282 Seat belts
fluid, refill capacity ................287 (see Safety restraints) .............117
fluid, specifications .........290, 292 Seats ..........................................105
child safety seats ....................141
Power Windows ...........................61 front seats ...............................106
Preparing to drive your heated ......................................110
vehicle ........................................204 memory seat .....................95, 109
Setting the clock
R AM/FM/CD .................................18
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ....23, 27, 32
Radio ..........................18, 21, 25, 30 Snowplowing .................................7
Rear window defroster ...............43 Spark plugs, specifications ......286,
Relays ................................221, 230 292
Remote entry system .................94 Special notice
illuminated entry ......................98 ambulance conversions ..............7
opening the trunk .....................95 utility-type vehicles ....................7
Reverse sensing system ...........209 Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................290, 292
Roadside assistance ..................219
Speed control ..............................64
Roof rack .....................................90
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......197
S Starting your vehicle ........195, 197
jump starting ..........................231
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........130
Steering wheel
Safety belts (see Safety controls ......................................66
restraints) ..........117, 119–123, 125 tilting .........................................56
Safety Canopy ...................135–136
T
Safety defects, reporting ..........246
Safety restraints ........117, 119–125 Tilt steering wheel ......................56
302
Index
Tire Pressure Monitoring fluid, checking and adding
System (TPMS) (automatic) .............................284
Maintenance and fluid, refill capacities ..............287
lubricant specifications ..290, 292
Specifications ..........................177
Roadside Emergencies ...........159 Trunk ...........................................95
Warning Displays ................14, 82 Turn signal ..................................47
Tires ...........................153–154, 159
V
alignment ................................174
care ..........................................173 Vehicle dimensions ...................292
changing ..........................159, 164
checking the pressure ............156 Vehicle Identification Number
inspecting and inflating .........155 (VIN) ..........................................294
label .........................................172 Vehicle loading ..........................182
replacing ..........................158, 164 Ventilating your vehicle ...........198
rotating ....................................175
safety practices .......................174 W
sidewall information ...............168
snow tires and chains ............181 Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
spare tire .................160, 162–163
terminology .............................155 Washer fluid ..............................257
tire grades ...............................154 Water, Driving through .............218
treadwear ........................154, 173 Windows
Towing .......................................189 power .........................................61
recreational towing .................194 rear wiper/washer .....................56
trailer towing ..........................189 Windshield washer fluid and
wrecker ....................................237 wipers ..........................................55
Transfer case checking and adding fluid .....257
fluid checking .........................285 liftgate reservoir .....................257
Transmission .............................205 replacing wiper blades .............56
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....205 Wrecker towing .........................237
303
304

2007 Mercury Mountaineer Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Mercury Mountaineer Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Mercury Mountaineer Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the owner's manual?

What are the main sections covered in the owner's manual?

What safety features are discussed?

What safety features are discussed?

Table of Contents

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Warning symbols in this guide

Warning symbols on your vehicle

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should

Service Data Recording

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide

Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front

Air Bag-Side Child Seat

Child Seat Installation Child Seat Lower

Child Seat Tether

Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control

Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe

Windshield Rear Window

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Panic Alarm Engine Oil

Do Not Open When Hot Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,

Explosive Gas Fan Warning

Emission System Engine Air Filter

Check fuel cap Low tire warning

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Optional instrument cluster

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Check fuel cap (if equipped): CHECK

Anti-lock brake system: If the

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Charging system: Illuminates when

Check gage: Illuminates when any CHECK

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

AWD lock (if equipped): AWD

Door ajar (if equipped):

Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Optional instrument cluster gauges

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Engine coolant temperature

Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.

• Optional instrument cluster

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

Tachometer: Indicates the engine

Battery voltage gauge: Indicates

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

2005 Mountaineer (mnt)

1. BAL (Balance): Press /